1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/attic/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
31 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
33 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
34 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
36 % for customized page headers/footers
37 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
39 % change header rule width
40 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
42 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
43 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
44 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
46 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
48 % the following added in Bahasa Indonesia Version
49 % to follow the most common style (centered chapters) in Indonesia
50 \addtokomafont{chapterentry}{\centering}
51 \addtokomafont{chapter}{\centering}
53 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
54 \use_default_options false
59 \maintain_unincluded_children false
61 \language_package default
64 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
65 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
66 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
67 \font_math "auto" "auto"
68 \font_default_family default
69 \use_non_tex_fonts false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "Petunjuk Penggunaan LyX"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 0
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 0
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 0
106 \use_package stmaryrd 0
107 \use_package undertilde 0
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation indent
135 \paragraph_indentation default
136 \quotes_language english
139 \paperpagestyle default
140 \tracking_changes false
141 \output_changes false
150 Petunjuk Penggunaan \SpecialChar LyX
155 oleh Tim \SpecialChar LyX
160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
162 Petunjuk dalam Bahasa Indonesia ini disunting oleh
167 Apabila anda mempunyai komentar atau menemukan kesalahan yang perlu dikoreksi,
168 silakan kirim komentar ke mailing list \SpecialChar LyX
172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
174 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 \begin_inset Note Note
199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
200 Versi PDF terkini dapat diperoleh disini:
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
206 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
207 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
215 \begin_layout Standard
216 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
217 LatexCommand tableofcontents
224 \begin_layout Chapter
228 \begin_layout Section
229 Apakah \SpecialChar LyX
233 \begin_layout Standard
235 adalah suatu sistem pengaturan dokumen yang digunakan untuk menyiapkan
236 manuskrip makalah, buku, surat bisnis, proposal, juga dapat digunakan untuk
240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
249 menggunakan paradigma bahasa perubahan sebagai inti dari gaya penyuntingan,
250 yaitu apabila anda menulis judul bab, maka anda hanya perlu menandainya
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
259 , tidak perlu menyatakan
260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
263 Huruf Tebal, ukuran 17
264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 pt, rata kiri, jarak ke baris berikutnya 5
268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
277 yang akan mengatur semuanya itu.
278 Anda hanya perlu memikirkan tentang isi dan konsep, bukan bagaimana pengaturan
282 \begin_layout Standard
283 Filosopi ini dijelaskan pada buku panduan
284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
296 Apabila belum membacanya, sangat disarankan anda membacanya terlebih dahulu
297 sebelum melanjutkan mempelajari buku panduan ini.
300 \begin_layout Standard
302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 , selain menjelaskan tentang filosofi \SpecialChar LyX
314 , juga menjelaskan tentang format
315 penulisan yang digunakan di semua buku panduan.
316 Oleh karena itu anda perlu meluangkan waktu untuk membacanya terlebih dahulu.
317 Buku panduan lain yang disarankan dipelajari sebelum membaca buku panduan
318 ini adalah buku panduan
319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
333 \begin_layout Section
334 Bagaimana Tampilan \SpecialChar LyX
338 \begin_layout Standard
339 Seperti umumnya aplikasi program lain, \SpecialChar LyX
340 mempunyai kotak menu utama di bagian
342 Dibagian bawahnya ada kotak bantuan yang berisi satu kotak pilihan serta
343 berbagai tombol bantuan.
344 Selain itu, ada gulungan vertikal dan area kerja utama untuk menyunting
348 \begin_layout Standard
349 Ada satu hal yang perlu anda ketahui, anda tidak akan menemukan gulungan
351 Hal ini bukanlah karena kutu program atau fitur yang terlupakan, tetapi
352 merupakan kesengajaan.
353 Teks yang ditulis dalam area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
354 akan selalu diteruskan di baris bawahnya
355 apabila melewati batas jendela kerja.
356 Oleh karena itu, \SpecialChar LyX
357 tidak memerlukan gulungan horisontal, cukup menggunakan
359 Mungkin ada tiga alasan mengapa anda masih memerlukan gulungan horisontal.
360 Yang pertama adalah apabila anda mempunyai gambar yang berukuran besar.
361 Untuk mengatasi hal ini, yang anda perlu lakukan adalah mengatur skala
362 gambar di \SpecialChar LyX
363 agar bisa ditampilan seluruhnya di area kerja \SpecialChar LyX
365 Alasan yang kedua dan ketiga adalah berkaitan dengan tabel dan persamaan
366 yang melebihi area kerja.
367 Untuk tabel, anda bisa menggunakan tombol panah untuk menggeser kursor
368 dalam tabel pada arah horisontal.
369 Namun demikian, hal ini belum dapat dilakukan untuk persamaan yang panjang
370 dan melebihi area kerja.
373 \begin_layout Standard
374 Penjelasan ringkas tentang semua menu \SpecialChar LyX
375 serta tombol bantuan yang ada, silahkan
381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
383 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
388 Hampir semua menu dapat dipahami dengan sendirinya dari nama menu.
389 Namun demikian anda dapat memperoleh penjelasan lanjut pada sub-bab dalam
395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
397 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
405 \begin_layout Section
409 \begin_layout Standard
410 Bantuan yang disediakan adalah dalam bentuk buku panduan \SpecialChar LyX
416 buku panduan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
418 Caranya sangat mudah, dari menu
422 , kemudian pilihlah buku panduan yang ingin anda baca.
425 \begin_layout Section
426 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LyX
428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
430 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
437 \begin_layout Standard
438 Ada beberapa fitur \SpecialChar LyX
439 dapat diatur dari dalam \SpecialChar LyX
440 , tanpa melakukan perubahan
441 atau menyunting secara langsung pada berkas konfigurasinya.
443 mampu memeriksa sistem anda untuk melihat perangkat lunak, class dokumen
445 , serta paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
447 Dengan kemampuan ini, \SpecialChar LyX
448 menggunakannya untuk menentukan pengaturan bawaan
454 \begin_inset Index idx
457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
464 Walaupun pengaturan konfigurasi bawaan sudah dilakukan ketika proses instalasi
466 , anda masih mempunyai keleluasaan untuk menambah program tambahan secara
467 lokal, misalnya \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 class, yang sebelumnya belum dikenal oleh \SpecialChar LyX
470 Untuk memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
471 untuk memeriksa ulang sistem anda, maka anda perlu menggunakan
474 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
478 \begin_inset Index idx
481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
482 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
489 Setelah proses konfigurasi ulang, anda harus menjalankan ulang \SpecialChar LyX
491 n semua perubahan diterapkan dalam \SpecialChar LyX
495 \begin_layout Section
496 Pengaturan \SpecialChar LaTeX
498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
500 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
507 \begin_layout Standard
508 Anda dapat menyunting dokumen dalam \SpecialChar LyX
509 tanpa instalasi \SpecialChar LaTeX
510 , namun demikian anda
511 tidak akan bisa melihat atau mebuat PDF atau mencetak dokumen tanpa \SpecialChar LaTeX
513 Apabila dokumen anda menggunakan DocBook, maka anda akan dapat menghasilkan
514 PDF atau yang setara, selain itu semua dokumen dalam DocBook akan mempunyai
515 keluaran sebagai plain text atau XHTML.
518 \begin_layout Standard
519 Beberapa class dokumen menggunakan kombinasi class \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 atau DocBook atau paket
523 Anda dapat menggunakan class dokumen tersebut walaupun anda tidak memiliki
524 berkas yang seharusnya sudah dipasang.
525 Tentu saja anda tidak dapat melihat hasil keluaran tanpa semua berkas terpasang
529 \begin_layout Standard
530 Semua paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
531 yang sudah dideteksi ada dalam sistem anda dapat dilihat melalui
534 Bantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
553 Apabila ada paket-paket yang belum terpasang, anda perlu melakukan instalasi
554 paket kemudian konfigurasi ulang (menu
556 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
564 \begin_inset Note Note
567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
568 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
569 Code box prevent that the term
570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
578 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
579 More about \SpecialChar TeX
580 Code is described in section
585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
587 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
591 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
592 is explained in section
597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
599 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
609 \begin_inset Index idx
612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
613 Konfigurasi Ulang \SpecialChar LyX
619 Informasi tentang bagaimana melakukan instalasi tambahan paket \SpecialChar LaTeX
621 lihat sub-bab 5.1 dari buku panduan
623 Perubahan dan Pengaturan
628 \begin_layout Chapter
629 Bagaimana Menggunakan \SpecialChar LyX
633 \begin_layout Section
634 Dasar Penggunaan Berkas
635 \begin_inset Index idx
638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
647 \begin_layout Standard
648 Semua penggunaan berkas dapat dimulai dari menu
652 serta ada di kotak bantuan dalam bentuk ikon tombol bantuan.
653 Beberapa menu yang berkaitan dengan berkas adalah:
656 \begin_layout Itemize
668 \begin_layout Itemize
682 \begin_layout Itemize
698 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \begin_layout Itemize
716 \begin_layout Itemize
734 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \begin_layout Itemize
754 \begin_layout Itemize
760 \begin_layout Itemize
766 \begin_layout Itemize
772 \begin_layout Standard
773 Secara umum, hampir semua operasi berkas mirip dengan yang ada di pengolah
775 Hanya saja di \SpecialChar LyX
776 ada sedikit perbedaan.
777 Apabila membuka berkas baru dari The
779 Berkas\SpecialChar menuseparator
781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
790 bukan hanya menuntun anda untuk memberi nama berkas tetapi juga memilih
791 templet yang akan anda gunakan.
792 Dengan memilih templet secara otomatis akan mengatur fitur utama tataletak
793 dokumen, sedangkan fitur lainnya dapat anda atur sendiri.
794 Templet mungkin menggunakan kelas dokumen tertentu (lihat subbab
799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
801 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
808 \begin_layout Standard
825 sangat berguna apabila anda bersama teman-teman anda menyunting berkas
830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
831 Apabila anda akan melakukan hal ini, anda perlu mempelajari fitur Kontrol
832 Versi yang ditulis di buku panduan
836 \SpecialChar endofsentence
851 akan memuat ulang dokumen dari cakra.
852 Anda dapat menggunakan operasi
860 untuk mengabaikan perubahan yang sudah anda lakukan dan mengembalikan ke
861 berkas terakhir yang anda simpan.
862 Dengan operasi berkas
870 anda dapat mendaftarkan catatan perubahan pada dokumen sehingga orang lain
871 akan dapat mengenali perubahan yang telah anda lakukan.
874 \begin_layout Section
875 Dasar Fitur Penyuntingan
876 \begin_inset Index idx
879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
888 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
895 \begin_layout Standard
896 Seperti pengolah kata modern lainnya, operasi penyuntingan dengan potong
897 dan tempel dalam \SpecialChar LyX
898 dapat dipraktekkan untuk teks, berupa karakter, kata,
899 maupun keseluruhan halaman atau bahkan lebih dari satu halaman.
900 Pada empat subbab berikut akan menjelaskan fitur penyuntingan yang ada
901 dalam \SpecialChar LyX
902 dan bagaimana memanfaatkannya.
903 Kita akan memulai dari potong dan tempel.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 Seperti yang anda perkirakan, menu
911 dan kotak bantuan standar menyediakan perintah potong dan tempelkan serta
912 fitur suntingan lainnya.
913 Beberapa perintah suntingan perlu pembahasan khusus sehingga dikelompokkan
914 dalam pembahasan subbab berikutnya.
915 Perintah suntingan utama adalah:
918 \begin_layout Itemize
932 \begin_layout Itemize
946 \begin_layout Itemize
960 \begin_layout Itemize
964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
974 \begin_layout Itemize
978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
984 \begin_layout Itemize
988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1000 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1006 \begin_layout Standard
1007 Tiga perintah suntingan yang pertama dapat dipahami dari nama perintahnya
1009 Hanya ada beberapa catatan: apabila anda memilih dan menandai teks di dokumen
1010 anda, maka secara otomatis akan tersimpam di papan klip.
1019 juga berfungsi sebagai perintah
1024 Selain itu yang paling penting, jika anda memilih dan menandai teks, harap
1025 hati-hati: jika anda menekan salah satu tombol, maka \SpecialChar LyX
1027 yang anda pilih tadi dan mengganti dengan dengan huruf atau karakter yang
1029 Untuk mengembalikannya, anda perlu melakukan perintah
1033 agar teks dikembalikan seperti semula.
1036 \begin_layout Standard
1037 \begin_inset Index idx
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 Anda dapat dapat menyalin teks di \SpecialChar LyX
1047 juga dari program lainnya menggunakan
1066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1081 akan menampilkan daftar teks yang terakhir anda tempelkan.
1084 \begin_layout Standard
1087 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1102 akan menyisipkan teks yang tersimpan di papan klip sedemikian sehingga teks
1103 yang disisipkan dalam
1108 Paragraf baru akan dimulai apabila ada baris kosong.
1113 , teks disisipkan sebagai paragraf baru, dimana setiap ganti baris menjadi
1117 \begin_layout Standard
1118 \begin_inset Index idx
1121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1128 \begin_inset Index idx
1131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1139 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1158 akan membuka jendela dialog
1161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1171 Apabila anda sudah menemukan kata atau ekspresi yang anda cari, \SpecialChar LyX
1174 Dengan menekan tombol
1178 , kata yang ditemukan tadi akan digantikan dengan teks yang ada di area
1184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1192 Anda bisa meneruskan pencarian dengan menekan tombol Berikutnya.
1193 Jika anda menekan tombol
1198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1205 maka semua kata yang ada di dokumen akan diganti seketika secara otomatis.
1209 \begin_layout Standard
1210 Apabila anda ingin mempertimbangkan huruf besar/kecil, anda perlu menggunakan
1213 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1253 anda bisa mengatur pencarian yang anda inginkan.
1254 Apabila anda mengkatifkan pilihan
1257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1266 , maka pencarian kata
1267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1299 akan memaksa \SpecialChar LyX
1300 hanya mencari kata tersebut, misalnya pencarian
1301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1312 tidak akan menemukan
1313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1328 offers also an advanced
1331 \begin_inset space ~
1335 \begin_inset space ~
1340 feature that is described in sec.
1341 \begin_inset space ~
1345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1347 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1354 \begin_layout Standard
1355 Beberapa sisipan tambahan berformat, seperti nota, ambangan, dll., dapat
1357 Maknanya apabila tanda sisipan dihilangkan, maka isinya akan berubah menjadi
1359 Cara menguraikan sisipan tambahan adalah dengan meletakkan kursor di lokasi
1360 paling depan dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan tombol ketik
1364 atau meletakkan kursor di bagian akhir dalam kotak sisipan kemudian menekan
1372 \begin_layout Standard
1375 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1378 arg "inset-select-all"
1384 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1387 selects the whole document.
1390 \begin_layout Section
1391 Batalkan dan Kembalikan
1392 \begin_inset Index idx
1395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1402 \begin_inset Index idx
1405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1414 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1421 \begin_layout Standard
1422 Jika anda membuat kesalahan anda dapat dengan mudah membatalkannya.
1423 Anda perlu ke menu Suntingan
1425 \SpecialChar menuseparator
1428 atau dari tombol bantuan
1438 untuk membatalkan apa yang baru saja anda lakukan.
1440 mempunyai kemampunyan menyimpan dalam kapasitas yang besar untuk membatalkan/m
1442 Saat ini mekanisme simpanan maksimum adalah sampai 100
1443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1447 Apabila secara tidak sengaja anda melakukan proses pembatalan yang terlebih,
1448 anda bisa mengembalikannya dari menu
1450 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1453 atau dengan menekan tombol
1462 \begin_layout Standard
1463 Apabila anda mengembalikan perubahan sampai ke kondisi dokumen saat terakhir
1464 disimpan, status dokumen
1465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1472 tidak akan menjadi normal kembali seperti tidak ada perubahan.
1473 Hal ini karena anda sebenarnya melakukan perubahan pada dokumen.
1476 \begin_layout Standard
1485 dapat dilakukan untuk apa saja di \SpecialChar LyX
1487 Namun demikian proses
1495 pada teks tidak dilakukan untuk setiap karakter, tetapi berlaku untuk kumpulan
1499 \begin_layout Section
1501 \begin_inset Index idx
1504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1513 \begin_layout Standard
1514 Berikut ini adalah dasar pengunaan tetikus.
1517 \begin_layout Enumerate
1519 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
1526 \begin_layout Itemize
1531 sekali di daerah jendela kerja \SpecialChar LyX
1533 Kursor akan mengikuti dan berkedip tepat di tempat anda menekan tombol
1538 \begin_layout Enumerate
1539 Memilih dan Menandai Teks
1540 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
1547 \begin_layout Itemize
1552 kemudian seret tetikus.
1554 akan menandai teks mulai dari awal kursor sebelum diseret sampai ke tempat
1555 posisi kursor setelah diseret.
1558 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1561 untuk membuat salinan teks dalam simpanan \SpecialChar LyX
1565 \begin_layout Itemize
1566 Pindahkan kursor ke tempat lain kemudian tempelkan teks yang disimpan ke
1567 lokasi baru, menggunakan
1569 Suntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
1576 \begin_layout Enumerate
1577 Sisipan Tambahan (Catatan kaki, Nota, Ambangan, etc.)
1578 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
1585 \begin_layout Standard
1590 pada sisipan tambahan untuk melihat propertinya.
1591 Anda perlu membaca pada bab tertentu di buku panduan ini untuk penjelasan
1596 \begin_layout Section
1598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1600 name "sec:Navigating"
1605 \begin_inset Index idx
1608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1617 \begin_layout Standard
1621 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1624 \begin_layout Itemize
1631 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1632 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1635 \begin_layout Itemize
1638 The `Outline', which is accessed either by the menu
1640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
1643 or by the toolbar button
1646 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1652 \begin_layout Itemize
1655 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1657 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1660 and use the same menu to return to them.
1661 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1664 \begin_layout Standard
1670 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1675 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1676 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1680 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1681 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1682 your last editing position.
1685 \begin_layout Subsection
1691 \begin_layout Standard
1694 The Outline was known in earlier versions of \SpecialChar LyX
1696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1703 , since its original purpose was to display the document's table of contents.
1704 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1705 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1706 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1707 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1710 LatexCommand formatted
1711 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1715 ), or notes, or citations (see
1716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1717 LatexCommand formatted
1718 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1723 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1725 The Outline has become much more powerful now, however.
1726 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1727 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1728 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1731 LatexCommand formatted
1732 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1736 ), or notes, or of citations (see
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1738 LatexCommand formatted
1739 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1744 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1748 \begin_layout Standard
1751 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline will in many cases open a context
1752 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1753 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1754 dialog and to modify the citation.
1755 Right-clicking a change will allow you to accept or reject it.
1759 \begin_layout Standard
1762 The `Filter' field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1764 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1765 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1773 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1776 \begin_layout Standard
1779 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1780 you further to control the display.
1785 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1786 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1791 option keeps it in the current view state.
1792 Keeping means that when you have e.
1793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1797 \begin_inset space \space{}
1800 the subsections of section
1801 \begin_inset space ~
1804 2 and 4 shown and click on section
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1808 3, the subsections of section
1809 \begin_inset space ~
1812 2 and 4 will still be shown.
1817 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1818 \begin_inset space ~
1822 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1832 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1835 \begin_layout Standard
1844 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1845 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1859 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1860 So, for example, you can move section
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1865 \begin_inset space ~
1868 2.4 or after section
1869 \begin_inset space ~
1874 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1887 (or the corresponding key bindings
1895 ) you can change the level of sections.
1896 So you can for example make section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1911 \begin_layout Section
1912 Masukan / Melengkapi Kata
1913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1915 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1920 \begin_inset Index idx
1923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1930 \begin_inset Index idx
1933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1964 \begin_layout Standard
1966 menyediakan data kata-kata untuk mempercepat proses penyuntingan dari hasil
1967 memindai kata-kata dalam dokumen yang sedang dibuka.
1968 Semua kata-kata yang ada dalam dokumen disimpan dalam basis data untuk
1969 digunakan melengkapi kata saat proses penyuntingan.
1972 \begin_layout Standard
1973 Pengaturan bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
1974 untuk melengkapi kata adalah dalam bentuk yang paling
1975 sederhana yaitu menggunakan tampilan kursor segitiga sebagai tanda bahwa
1976 sudah ada kata tersedia.
1977 Anda tinggal menggunakan tombol
1981 untuk melengkapi kata.
1982 Apabila ada beberapa pilihan kata tersedia, jendela kecil akan muncul dan
1983 menampilkan kata-kata tersebut.
1984 Anda dapat memilih dengan menggunakan tetikus atau tombol panah, kemudian
1985 menetapkan pilihan dengan menekan tombol
1993 \begin_layout Standard
1994 Untuk menghilangkan tanda melengkapi segitiga, anda perlu mengubah pengaturan
1997 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2000 kemudian dari seksi Penyuntingan
2002 \SpecialChar menuseparator
2004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2009 anda perlu melepaskan pilihan
2014 Sedangkan pengaturan
2016 Melengkapi kata otomatis pada baris
2018 , pilihan kata akan ditampilkan pada baris dibelakang posisi kursor.
2019 Untuk menerima saran kata yang muncul pada baris, anda cukup menekan tombol
2025 Apabila menggunakan pengaturan
2027 Menampilkan jendela pilihan otomatis
2029 , maka jendela pilihan kata akan selalu ditampilkan.
2031 mempunyai berbagai pengaturan melengkapi kata untuk yang sudah mahir.
2032 Pengaturan lanjut akan dapat ditemui di subbab.
2033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2039 reference "subsec:Input-Completion-Appendix"
2046 \begin_layout Section
2047 Gabungan tombol ketik
2048 \begin_inset Index idx
2051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2052 Gabungan tombol ketik
2058 \begin_inset Index idx
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2073 Gabungan tombol ketik
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2090 \begin_inset Index idx
2093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2124 \begin_layout Standard
2125 Ada dua peta utama untuk gabungan tombol ketik: CUA dan Emacs.
2126 Bawaan \SpecialChar LyX
2130 \begin_layout Standard
2131 Beberapa tombol ketik, seperti
2134 \begin_inset space ~
2142 \begin_inset space ~
2163 , sudah dapat berfungsi seperti yang anda harapkan.
2164 Namun demikian beberapa tombol ketik mungkin perlu dipahami fungsinya.
2167 \begin_layout Labeling
2168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2172 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2173 LatexCommand nomenclature
2175 description "Tombol ketik Tabulator"
2181 LyC tidak memfungsikan tombol ini sebagai hentian tab.
2182 Apabila anda belum memahaminya anda silahkan sekarang membaca terlebih
2184 \begin_inset space ~
2188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2190 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2197 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2208 reference "subsec:Lists"
2214 Apabila anda masih merasa belum mengerti juga, mungkin anda perlu membaca
2222 \begin_layout Labeling
2223 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2227 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2228 LatexCommand nomenclature
2230 description "Tombol ketik Escape"
2236 Tombol ini digunakan sebagai
2237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2244 Secara umum tombol ini memang digunakan untuk membatalkan penyuntingan.
2245 Buku petunjuk ini juga akan membahas lebih terperinci tentang pemanfaatannya.
2248 \begin_layout Labeling
2249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2255 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset space ~
2270 akan memindahkan kursor ke bagian awal dari baris dan tombol
2274 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir baris.
2275 Jika anda menggunakan peta Emacs,
2279 memindah ke bagian awal berkas sementara
2283 memindah kursor ke bagian akhir berkas.
2286 \begin_layout Standard
2287 Ada tiga tombol ketik pengubah:
2290 \begin_layout Labeling
2291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2296 (Diseluruh buku petunjuk Disingkat dengan
2297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2309 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2310 LatexCommand nomenclature
2312 description "Tombol ketik Control"
2316 ) Tombol ini mempunyai beberapa fungsi, tergantung dengan tombol ketik lain
2317 yang dikombinasikan:
2318 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
2325 \begin_layout Itemize
2334 , akan menghapus seluruh kata bukan hanya satu karakter.
2337 \begin_layout Itemize
2346 , akan menggerakkan kursor satu kata kekiri atau kekanan.
2349 \begin_layout Itemize
2358 , akan memindah kursor ke bagian awal dokumen atau ke bagian akhir dokumen.
2362 \begin_layout Labeling
2363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2368 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2381 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2382 LatexCommand nomenclature
2384 description "Tombol ketik Shift"
2388 ) Tombol ini digunakan untuk menandai teks dengan tombol panah, dimulai
2389 dari posisi awal ke sampai berhenti menggerakkan.
2392 \begin_layout Labeling
2393 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2398 (Dalam buku petunjuk disebut dengan
2399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2411 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2412 LatexCommand nomenclature
2414 description "Tombol ketik Alt atau tombol ketik Meta"
2418 ) Sebagian besar papan ketik mempunyai tombol Alt, hanya beberapa papan
2419 ketik yang menggunakan tombol Meta.
2420 Jika anda memiliki keduanya, anda harus mencoba untuk memastikan tombol
2421 yang benar-benar aktif sebagai
2426 Tombol ini memiliki berbagai kegunaan selain berfungsi sebagai tombol
2431 Apabila anda menggunakan dengan kombinasi huruf dibawah menu, berarti and
2432 memilih menu tersebut.
2433 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
2440 \begin_layout Standard
2441 Misalnya, urutan menekan tombol
2442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2448 \begin_inset space ~
2452 \begin_inset space ~
2458 \begin_inset space ~
2462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2465 akan membawa anda ke dialog
2466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2481 \begin_inset space ~
2487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2497 \begin_layout Standard
2502 memberikan daftar berbagai kombinasi perintah yang dinyatakan dengan tombol
2511 \begin_layout Standard
2512 Anda akan banyak menemukan berbagai gabungan tombol ketik serta pintasan
2513 yang digunakan di \SpecialChar LyX
2514 , karena setiap perintah gabungan akan menampilkan aksi
2515 yang anda lakukan serta pilihan gabungan tombol ketik lain yang bisa anda
2516 pilih di jendela status bawah.
2517 Notasi gabungan tombol ketik yang muncul akan mirip dengan yang digunakan
2518 di buku petunjuk, sehingga tidak membingungkan anda.
2519 Namun demikian untuk tombol Shift akan dinyatakan secara eksplisit, sehingga
2521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2536 diikuti dengan menulis huruf besar
2543 \begin_layout Standard
2544 Anda bisa melihat berbagai perintah gabungan melalui menu
2546 AlatBantuan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2551 Penyuntingan\SpecialChar menuseparator
2553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2558 seperti dijelaskan di subbab
2559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2565 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2572 \begin_layout Chapter
2575 \begin_inset Index idx
2578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2588 \begin_layout Section
2590 \begin_inset Index idx
2593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2602 \begin_layout Subsection
2606 \begin_layout Standard
2607 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2608 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2609 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2610 numbering schemes, and so on.
2611 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2612 and format the title of your document differently.
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2620 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2621 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2622 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2623 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2624 picks one for you by default.
2625 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2628 \begin_layout Standard
2629 Read on for info about the document classes you can choose from \SpecialChar LyX
2631 to adjust their properties.
2634 \begin_layout Subsection
2636 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2648 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2655 \begin_layout Standard
2656 You can select a class using the
2658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2659 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2663 \begin_inset Index idx
2666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2673 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2681 \begin_layout Standard
2682 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2687 \begin_layout Description
2688 Article for basic articles
2691 \begin_layout Description
2692 Report for basic reports
2695 \begin_layout Description
2696 Book for writing a book
2699 \begin_layout Description
2700 Letter for US-style letters
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2705 only uses if you have installed
2706 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2707 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2708 distributions will include
2710 Here are some of the classes.
2711 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2713 Special Document Classes
2722 \begin_layout Description
2723 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2726 \begin_layout Description
2727 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2731 \begin_layout Description
2732 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2736 \begin_layout Description
2737 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2738 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2739 There are three article layouts available.
2740 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2741 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2742 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2743 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2748 sequential numbering
2749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2752 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2753 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2754 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2755 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2758 \begin_layout Description
2759 Beamer Layout for presentations
2762 \begin_layout Description
2763 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2764 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2765 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2766 with \SpecialChar LyX
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2774 \begin_layout Description
2776 \begin_inset space ~
2779 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2782 \begin_layout Description
2783 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2786 \begin_layout Description
2787 Foils Used to make transparencies
2790 \begin_layout Description
2791 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2792 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2793 document class, but a new one which is distributed
2794 with \SpecialChar LyX
2798 \begin_layout Description
2799 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2800 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2803 \begin_layout Description
2804 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2811 \begin_layout Description
2812 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2813 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2814 (Is used by this document.)
2817 \begin_layout Description
2818 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2821 \begin_layout Description
2822 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2825 \begin_layout Description
2830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2837 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2838 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2840 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2844 \begin_layout Description
2845 Slides Used to make transparencies
2848 \begin_layout Description
2850 \begin_inset space ~
2853 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2854 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2857 \begin_layout Description
2858 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 We won't go into any detail about how to use these different document classes
2864 You can find all the details about the non-standard classes in Chapter
2870 Here, we will settle with a list of some of the common properties of all
2871 of the document classes.
2874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2878 \begin_layout Standard
2879 New users are sometimes puzzled by the fact that many of the document classes
2882 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2883 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2905 Or they are surprised that, when they open e.
2906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2910 \begin_inset space ~
2917 template, they receive a warning saying that the document requires files
2918 that are not installed to produce output.
2919 So it seems that something is wrong.
2922 \begin_layout Standard
2923 But nothing is wrong.
2925 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2930 , are highly specialized.\SpecialChar LyX
2931 tries to support as many different types of documents
2932 as possible, and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
2933 with a growing number.
2934 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2935 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2936 by some document class.
2937 There are just too many of them.
2938 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2941 \begin_layout Standard
2942 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as `Unavailabl
2943 e', you need to install the appropriate package files.
2944 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2945 document class for a new file.
2947 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2952 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
2954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2961 manual for information on how to install them.
2962 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2968 \begin_layout Standard
2969 Although \SpecialChar LyX
2970 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
2971 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
2972 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
2973 class files to be used for dissertation
2974 s submitted to those universities.
2975 The \SpecialChar LyX
2976 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2978 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2981 \begin_inset space ~
2988 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2995 name "subsec:Modules"
3000 \begin_inset Index idx
3003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3012 \begin_layout Standard
3013 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3014 chosen document class.
3015 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3016 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3027 \begin_inset Index idx
3030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3037 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of the
3041 \begin_layout Standard
3042 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 packages that are not always installed by default.
3045 will warn you if you do not have the needed package.
3046 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3047 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3049 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3050 file without the missing package.
3051 If you want to be able to produce output, then you need to install the
3052 missing package and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3055 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3059 \begin_inset Index idx
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3073 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3082 manual for more information on installing needed packages.
3085 \begin_layout Standard
3086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3094 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3096 will advise you about these things.
3104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3108 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3113 \begin_inset Index idx
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 Document ! Local Layout
3125 \begin_layout Standard
3126 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3127 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3128 : They are intended to be used in
3129 a variety of different documents, and if you often find yourself needing
3130 the same sort of thing in different documents, you should consider writing
3131 a module for this purpose.
3132 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, and you
3133 find yourself wanting a specific inset or character style, but only that
3135 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3137 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3155 manual for information on how to use it.
3158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3162 \begin_layout Standard
3163 Each class has a default set of options.
3164 Here's a quick table describing them:
3167 \begin_layout Standard
3168 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3176 \begin_inset Tabular
3177 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3178 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3179 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3180 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3182 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3183 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3637 \begin_layout Standard
3638 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3644 \begin_layout Standard
3645 You're probably also wondering what
3646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3650 \begin_inset space ~
3654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3658 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3659 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3664 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3669 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3679 headings, there are also
3687 headings, and so on.
3688 We'll describe these headings fully in section
3689 \begin_inset space ~
3693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3695 reference "subsec:Headings"
3702 \begin_layout Subsection
3704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3706 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3711 \begin_inset Index idx
3714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3723 \begin_inset Index idx
3726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 \begin_layout Standard
3736 The most important properties of documents classes are set in the menu
3738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3749 \begin_inset space ~
3754 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3756 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3757 doesn't support special options you want to
3758 use for your document.
3759 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3760 -class and its options, you have to read
3764 \begin_layout Standard
3771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3777 \begin_inset space ~
3782 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3783 You can choose between the following five options:
3786 \begin_layout Labeling
3787 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3792 Use default page style of current class.
3795 \begin_layout Labeling
3796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3801 No page numbers or headings.
3804 \begin_layout Labeling
3805 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3813 \begin_layout Labeling
3814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3819 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3820 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3821 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3822 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3825 \begin_layout Labeling
3826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3831 This allows you to create fully customizable headers and footers if you
3832 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3838 \begin_inset Index idx
3841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 -packages ! fancyhdr
3849 How they are defined is explained in section
3850 \begin_inset space ~
3854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3856 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3863 \begin_layout Standard
3864 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3865 \begin_inset space ~
3869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3871 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3878 \begin_layout Subsection
3879 Paper Size and Orientation
3880 \begin_inset Index idx
3883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3884 Document ! Paper size
3890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3892 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3899 \begin_layout Standard
3900 You'll find the following options in the menu
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3910 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3916 \begin_inset Index idx
3919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3928 \begin_layout Labeling
3929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3933 \begin_inset space ~
3938 What size paper to print on.
3942 \begin_layout Itemize
3948 \begin_layout Itemize
3958 \begin_layout Itemize
3964 \begin_layout Itemize
3970 \begin_layout Itemize
3976 \begin_layout Itemize
3982 \begin_layout Itemize
3988 \begin_layout Labeling
3989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3994 To choose whether to output as
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4010 \begin_inset space ~
4015 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4016 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4019 \begin_layout Subsection
4021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4023 name "subsec:Margins"
4028 \begin_inset Index idx
4031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4038 \begin_inset Index idx
4041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4050 \begin_layout Standard
4051 Paper margins are set in the menu
4053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4057 \begin_inset Index idx
4060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4069 \begin_layout Standard
4070 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings.
4071 Because KOMA-Script calculates then the printspace automatically by taking
4072 the paper format and the font size into account.
4075 \begin_layout Subsection
4079 \begin_layout Standard
4080 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4086 That includes the paragraph environments.
4087 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4088 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4089 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4091 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4100 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4102 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4103 will either need to create a new style yourself or else to convert these
4104 paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
4107 \begin_layout Section
4108 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4109 \begin_inset Index idx
4112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4113 Paragraph ! Indentation
4121 \begin_layout Subsection
4123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4125 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4134 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4137 \begin_layout Standard
4138 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4139 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4140 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4141 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4145 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4151 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4152 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4153 language than English.
4155 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the used language.
4158 \begin_layout Standard
4159 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4160 and text — in fact, all of the spacings for just about everything are pre-coded
4161 into \SpecialChar LyX
4163 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4166 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4168 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4169 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4170 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4177 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4178 goes to produce a printable file.
4183 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4185 gives you the ability to globally change
4189 of these pre-coded spacings.
4190 We'll explain more later.
4193 \begin_layout Subsection
4194 Paragraph Separation
4195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4197 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4202 \begin_inset Index idx
4205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4206 Paragraph ! Separation
4214 \begin_layout Standard
4215 To separate paragraphs, select
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4237 \begin_inset Index idx
4240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4246 to indent paragraphs or add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4247 The size of the skips can be defined in the dialog, for the indentation
4248 you have to add this line to your document preamble:
4251 \begin_layout Standard
4261 \begin_layout Standard
4262 where length is a value in one of the units listed in Appendix
4263 \begin_inset space ~
4267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4269 reference "cap:Units"
4274 The default length is 30
4275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
4281 \begin_layout Subsection
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4291 \begin_inset space ~
4296 dialog and toggle the
4299 \begin_inset space ~
4304 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4307 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4311 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4312 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4316 \begin_layout Standard
4317 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4318 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4321 \begin_layout Subsection
4323 \begin_inset Index idx
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4327 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4335 \begin_layout Standard
4338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4342 \begin_inset Index idx
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4354 dialog you can set the line spacing in the submenu
4357 \begin_inset space ~
4366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4367 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4373 \begin_inset Index idx
4376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4378 -packages ! setspace
4383 installed to use this feature.
4391 \begin_layout Section
4392 Paragraph Environments
4393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4395 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4400 \begin_inset Index idx
4403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 Paragraph ! Environments
4410 \begin_inset Index idx
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 Paragraph environments|(
4422 \begin_layout Subsection
4426 \begin_layout Standard
4427 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4449 \begin_inset Newline newline
4452 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4454 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4455 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4456 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4465 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4468 \begin_layout Standard
4469 A paragraph environment is simply a
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4478 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4479 scheme, labels, and so on.
4480 Additionally, you can
4481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4488 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4489 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4490 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4491 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hold-overs from the
4492 days of typewriters.
4493 There are several paragraph environments which are specific to a particular
4495 We'll only be covering the most common ones here.
4498 \begin_layout Standard
4499 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4500 \begin_inset Graphics
4501 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4507 at the left end of the toolbar.
4509 will change the environment of the
4513 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4514 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4515 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4528 create a new paragraph using the
4532 paragraph environment.
4534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4541 because if you are in one of these environments:
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Itemize
4580 \begin_layout Itemize
4586 \begin_layout Standard
4588 keeps the old paragraph environment when you hit
4592 , rather than resetting it to
4598 will still reset the nesting depth, however.
4599 Usually, starting a new paragraph resets both the paragraph environment
4600 and the nesting depth (for more on nesting see section
4601 \begin_inset space ~
4605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4607 reference "sec:Nesting"
4612 At the moment, all this is context-specific; you're better off expecting
4617 to reset the paragraph environment and depth.
4618 If you want a new paragraph to keep the current environment and depth,
4622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
4628 \begin_layout Subsection
4632 \begin_layout Standard
4633 The default paragraph environment is
4638 It creates a plain paragraph.
4640 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4641 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4642 this manual) are in the
4649 \begin_layout Standard
4650 You can nest a paragraph using the
4654 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4662 \begin_layout Subsection
4664 \begin_inset Index idx
4667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4676 \begin_layout Standard
4677 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4678 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 for thanks or contact information.
4688 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4689 places all of this on a separate page
4690 along with today's date.
4691 For other types of documents, the title
4692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4699 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4703 \begin_layout Standard
4705 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4719 Here's how you use them:
4722 \begin_layout Itemize
4723 Put the title of your document in the
4730 \begin_layout Itemize
4731 Put the author name in the
4738 \begin_layout Itemize
4739 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4740 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4746 Note that using this environment is optional.
4747 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4748 will automatically insert today's date.
4749 If you don't want any date, add the line
4750 \begin_inset Newline newline
4760 \begin_inset Newline newline
4763 to the preamble of your document (menu
4765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4771 \begin_layout Standard
4772 You can use footnotes to insert
4773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4780 or contact information.
4783 \begin_layout Subsection
4785 \begin_inset Index idx
4788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4797 name "subsec:Headings"
4804 \begin_layout Standard
4805 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4807 takes care of the numbering for you.
4810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4812 \begin_inset Index idx
4815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4816 Section headings ! Numbered
4824 \begin_layout Standard
4825 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4829 \begin_layout Enumerate
4835 \begin_layout Enumerate
4841 \begin_layout Enumerate
4847 \begin_layout Enumerate
4853 \begin_layout Enumerate
4859 \begin_layout Enumerate
4865 \begin_layout Enumerate
4871 \begin_layout Standard
4873 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4874 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4875 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4878 \begin_layout Standard
4879 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4880 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4881 You group the book into chapters.
4883 does similar grouping:
4886 \begin_layout Itemize
4891 is divided in either
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Itemize
4950 \begin_layout Itemize
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Not all document types use the
4975 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4980 is the top-level heading.
4988 \begin_layout Standard
4993 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
4994 labels it with its number,
4995 along with the number of the subsection, section, and, if applicable, chapter
4997 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5011 \begin_inset Index idx
5014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5023 \begin_layout Standard
5024 The unnumbered section headings have a
5025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5032 at the end of their name.
5033 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5034 the table of contents, see section
5035 \begin_inset space ~
5039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5049 Changing the Numbering
5050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5052 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5059 \begin_layout Standard
5060 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5061 in the Table of Contents.
5062 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5064 Certain classes start with
5078 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5088 This is something you can change.
5091 \begin_layout Standard
5094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5100 \begin_inset Index idx
5103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5114 \begin_inset space ~
5118 \begin_inset space ~
5123 you'll see two counters.
5128 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5129 numbers a section heading.
5130 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5135 Short Titles of Headings
5136 \begin_inset Index idx
5139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5140 Section headings ! Short titles
5146 \begin_inset Argument 1
5149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5158 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5166 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5167 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5168 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5169 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5172 \begin_layout Standard
5174 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5175 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5176 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5177 To specify a short title, use the menu
5179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5181 \begin_inset space ~
5187 This will insert a box labeled
5188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5203 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
5204 This also works for captions inside floats.
5207 \begin_layout Standard
5208 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5211 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The following information applies to all section headings:
5219 \begin_layout Itemize
5220 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5223 \begin_layout Itemize
5224 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5227 \begin_layout Itemize
5228 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5231 \begin_layout Itemize
5232 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5235 \begin_layout Subsection
5236 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5239 \begin_layout Standard
5241 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5255 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5256 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5257 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5258 the text they contain.
5259 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5267 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5271 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5280 when you start a new paragraph.
5281 So, you can type in that poem and merrily hit
5285 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5286 Of course, that means that, once you're done typing in that poem, you have
5287 to change back to the
5291 environment yourself.
5294 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5311 \begin_inset Index idx
5314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5323 \begin_layout Standard
5324 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5325 time for the differences.
5334 are identical except for one difference:
5338 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5347 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5350 \begin_layout Standard
5351 Here's an example of the
5364 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5366 See – no indentation!
5370 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5371 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5372 the other paragraph.
5375 \begin_layout Standard
5376 Here's another example, this time in the
5383 \begin_layout Quotation
5389 If I keep writing, you'll see the indentation.
5390 If your country uses a writing style that shows off new paragraphs by indenting
5391 the first line, then
5395 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5399 you were quoting other text.
5402 \begin_layout Quotation
5403 Here's a new paragraph.
5404 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5405 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5408 \begin_layout Standard
5409 As the examples show,
5413 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5414 They should put quotes in the
5419 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5423 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5432 \begin_inset Index idx
5435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5444 \begin_inset Index idx
5447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5463 \begin_layout Standard
5468 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5474 \begin_inset Newline newline
5477 Which I did not rehearse!
5481 It could be much worse.
5482 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5484 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5485 indented a bit more than the first.
5486 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5492 \begin_inset Newline newline
5495 And make things look fine
5496 \begin_inset Newline newline
5502 arg "newline-insert newline"
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5513 does not indent both margins.
5514 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5515 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5522 arg "newline-insert newline"
5528 \begin_layout Subsection
5530 \begin_inset Index idx
5533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5549 \begin_layout Standard
5551 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5561 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5562 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5571 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5572 lets you provide your own label.
5573 We'll present the individual details of each type of list next after describing
5574 some general features of all four of them.
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5584 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5585 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5594 reset the environment to
5598 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5599 The nesting depth is hereby kept.
5600 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5607 to break paragraphs.
5610 \begin_layout Standard
5611 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5612 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5613 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5615 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5616 you read all of section
5617 \begin_inset space ~
5621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5623 reference "sec:Nesting"
5631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5637 \begin_inset Index idx
5640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5657 The first type of list we'll describe in detail is the
5661 paragraph environment.
5662 It has the following properties:
5665 \begin_layout Itemize
5666 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5667 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5674 \begin_layout Itemize
5676 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5684 \begin_layout Itemize
5685 The items can have any length.
5687 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5688 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5695 \begin_layout Itemize
5700 environment inside another
5704 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5705 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5713 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5716 \begin_layout Itemize
5718 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5721 \begin_layout Itemize
5723 \begin_inset space ~
5727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5729 reference "sec:Nesting"
5733 for a full explanation of nesting.
5737 \begin_layout Standard
5738 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5747 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5750 \begin_layout Standard
5751 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5752 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5755 \begin_layout Itemize
5756 The label for the first level
5760 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5761 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5769 The label for the second level is a dash.
5770 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5777 \begin_layout Itemize
5778 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5779 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5786 \begin_layout Itemize
5787 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5791 \begin_layout Itemize
5792 Back out to the third level.
5796 \begin_layout Itemize
5797 Back to the second level.
5801 \begin_layout Itemize
5802 Back to the outermost level.
5805 \begin_layout Standard
5806 These are the default labels for an
5811 You can customize these labels in the
5813 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5816 dialog in the submenu
5823 \begin_inset Index idx
5826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5836 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5837 We'll explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5839 \begin_inset space ~
5843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5845 reference "sec:Nesting"
5852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5858 \begin_inset Index idx
5861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5870 name "sec:Enumerate"
5877 \begin_layout Standard
5882 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5883 It has these properties:
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5888 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5895 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5900 \begin_layout Enumerate
5902 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 environment resets the counter to one.
5913 \begin_layout Enumerate
5923 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5930 \begin_layout Enumerate
5931 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5932 Items can have any length.
5935 \begin_layout Enumerate
5936 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5939 \begin_layout Enumerate
5940 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5943 \begin_layout Enumerate
5944 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5948 \begin_layout Standard
5957 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5959 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5960 labels the four different levels in an
5967 \begin_layout Enumerate
5968 The first level of an
5972 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5973 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5980 \begin_layout Enumerate
5981 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5982 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5989 \begin_layout Enumerate
5990 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5991 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
5998 \begin_layout Enumerate
5999 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6002 \begin_layout Enumerate
6003 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6008 \begin_layout Enumerate
6009 Back to the third level
6013 \begin_layout Enumerate
6014 Back to the second level.
6018 \begin_layout Enumerate
6019 Back to the outermost level.
6022 \begin_layout Standard
6023 Once again, you can customize the type of numbering used in the
6028 It involves adding commands to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6034 As stated earlier, such customization only shows up in the printed version,
6035 not in \SpecialChar LyX
6039 \begin_layout Standard
6040 There is more to nesting
6044 environments than we've stated here.
6045 You should read section
6046 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6052 reference "sec:Nesting"
6056 to learn more about nesting.
6059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6065 \begin_inset Index idx
6068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6077 \begin_layout Standard
6078 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6082 list has no fixed label.
6083 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6092 of the first line as the label.
6096 \begin_layout Description
6097 Example: This is an example of the
6104 \begin_layout Standard
6106 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6110 \begin_layout Standard
6112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6119 it is meant that the first hit of the
6123 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6125 If you need to use more than one word in the label use a
6133 arg "space-insert protected"
6138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6139 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6141 \begin_inset space ~
6147 \begin_inset space ~
6151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6153 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6157 for more info.) Here is an example:
6160 \begin_layout Description
6162 \begin_inset space ~
6165 Example: This one shows how to use a
6168 \begin_inset space ~
6180 \begin_layout Description
6181 Usage: You should use the
6185 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6186 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6188 It's not a good idea to use a
6192 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6193 You're better off using
6205 paragraphs into them.
6208 \begin_layout Description
6209 Nesting: You can nest
6213 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6217 \begin_layout Standard
6218 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6219 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6220 them from the first line.
6223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6224 The \SpecialChar LyX
6230 \begin_inset Index idx
6233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6234 Lists ! \SpecialChar LyX
6243 \begin_layout Standard
6248 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6249 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6253 \begin_layout Standard
6254 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6262 When you are using a KOMA-Script document class, like in this document,
6267 environment is named
6279 \begin_layout Standard
6288 environment has user-defined labels for each list item.
6289 There are the following properties of this list environment:
6292 \begin_layout Labeling
6293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6295 \begin_inset space ~
6298 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6307 of each line as the item label.
6312 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6313 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6314 blank as described above.
6317 \begin_layout Labeling
6318 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6319 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6320 uses different margins for the item label and the
6321 body of the item text.
6322 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6323 label width plus a little extra space.
6327 \begin_layout Labeling
6328 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6333 width \SpecialChar LyX
6334 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6335 If the label width is larger, the label
6336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6343 into the first line.
6344 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6345 margin of the rest of the item text.
6348 \begin_layout Labeling
6349 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6351 \begin_inset space ~
6354 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6359 environment have the same left margin.
6360 \begin_inset Newline newline
6363 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6368 \begin_inset space ~
6377 \begin_inset space ~
6382 determines the default label width.
6383 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6392 multiple times instead.
6393 The M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6403 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6406 \begin_inset space ~
6411 every time you alter a label in a
6416 \begin_inset Newline newline
6419 The predefined default width is the length of
6420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6429 \begin_inset Newline newline
6433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6441 Setting the cursor into a list item to change only its label width will
6442 only change the width inside \SpecialChar LyX
6443 but not in the output.
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6456 environment the same way like the
6460 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6466 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6470 \begin_layout Standard
6475 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6477 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6479 \begin_inset space ~
6483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6485 reference "sec:Nesting"
6489 to learn about nesting.
6492 \begin_layout Standard
6493 There is yet another feature of the
6497 environment: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6498 left-justifies the item labels
6500 You can use additional
6504 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6505 justifies the item label.
6510 are documented in section
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6517 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6522 Here are some examples:
6523 \begin_inset Newpage pagebreak
6529 \begin_layout Labeling
6530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6531 Left The default for
6538 \begin_layout Labeling
6539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6540 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6547 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6550 \begin_layout Labeling
6551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6552 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6556 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6563 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6566 \begin_layout Subsection
6568 \begin_inset Index idx
6571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6580 \begin_layout Standard
6581 To use the features described in this section, you must load the module
6584 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6586 in the document settings.
6587 This loads the features of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6593 \begin_inset Index idx
6596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6598 -packages ! enumitem
6606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6607 Custom Enumerate Lists
6608 \begin_inset Index idx
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6612 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6620 \begin_layout Standard
6622 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6625 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6628 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6629 There you add the command
6632 \begin_layout Standard
6640 \begin_layout Standard
6652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6653 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6654 Code, look at section
6655 \begin_inset space ~
6659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6661 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6674 is hereby the counter of the enumeration in the first level.
6681 outputs the counter as small Roman numeral.
6682 For capital Roman numerals replace in the command above
6695 For Arabic numerals use
6703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6710 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6725 \begin_layout Standard
6727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 You can only number 26
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6739 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6747 \begin_layout Standard
6748 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6749 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6752 \begin_layout Standard
6753 As example a list with custom numbering:
6756 \begin_layout Enumerate
6757 \begin_inset Argument 1
6760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6783 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6790 \begin_layout Enumerate
6791 \begin_inset Argument 1
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 \begin_layout Enumerate
6819 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6826 \begin_layout Enumerate
6827 \begin_inset Argument 1
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
6858 \begin_layout Enumerate
6859 \begin_inset Argument 1
6862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6888 \begin_layout Standard
6889 For this list these commands were used:
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6903 \begin_inset Newline newline
6911 \begin_inset Newline newline
6919 \begin_inset Newline newline
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6936 makes the label emphasized and
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6946 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6954 When you changed the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6955 lists until you change the definition.
6963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6965 \begin_inset Index idx
6968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6971 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6980 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6983 \begin_layout Enumerate
6984 \begin_inset Argument 1
6987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7006 \begin_inset Note Note
7009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7012 goes back to default numbering
7020 \begin_layout Enumerate
7024 \begin_layout Standard
7028 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7038 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7039 to indicate that it is a resumed
7040 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7041 , but in the output.
7044 \begin_layout Standard
7045 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7062 \begin_layout Standard
7063 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number than the
7065 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7066 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7067 of a normal new enumeration.
7068 There insert the command
7071 \begin_layout Standard
7077 \begin_layout Standard
7082 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Enumerate
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7098 \begin_layout Enumerate
7099 \begin_inset Argument 1
7102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 This enumeration starts at 4
7121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7123 \begin_inset Index idx
7126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7138 For example the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7141 \begin_layout Itemize
7145 \begin_layout Itemize
7146 with standard spacing
7149 \begin_layout Standard
7150 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7152 There add the command
7156 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7159 \begin_layout Itemize
7160 \begin_inset Argument 1
7163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7182 \begin_layout Itemize
7186 \begin_layout Itemize
7190 \begin_layout Standard
7191 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7198 \begin_inset Index idx
7201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7203 -packages ! enumitem
7209 For more info see its documentation,
7210 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7219 \begin_layout Standard
7220 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7222 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to the one of the
7223 paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7227 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7230 \begin_layout Enumerate
7231 \begin_inset Argument 1
7234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7242 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7255 \begin_layout Enumerate
7256 with negative indentation
7259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7260 Further Customization
7261 \begin_inset Index idx
7264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 \begin_layout Standard
7274 You can also change the style of description lists.
7278 \begin_layout Standard
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7285 changes the description label font, the command
7288 \begin_layout Standard
7294 \begin_layout Standard
7295 sets the list style.
7298 \begin_layout Standard
7299 An example where the command
7302 \begin_layout Standard
7307 itshape, style=nextline
7310 \begin_layout Standard
7314 \begin_layout Description
7316 \begin_inset space ~
7320 \begin_inset Argument 1
7323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7331 itshape, style=nextline
7341 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7342 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7346 \begin_layout Description
7348 \begin_inset space ~
7351 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7352 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7353 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7356 \begin_layout Standard
7357 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7363 \begin_inset Index idx
7366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 -packages ! enumitem
7376 For more info see its documentation,
7377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7386 \begin_layout Subsection
7388 \begin_inset Index idx
7391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7408 \begin_inset space ~
7416 \begin_layout Standard
7417 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7418 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7426 \begin_inset space ~
7432 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7433 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7434 gags on the document.
7435 In contrast, you can use the
7442 \begin_inset space ~
7447 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7448 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 Of course, you're not limited to using
7460 \begin_inset space ~
7469 \begin_inset space ~
7474 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7475 some European academic papers.
7478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7482 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7489 \begin_layout Standard
7494 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7495 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7505 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7506 Here's an example of each:
7509 \begin_layout Right Address
7511 \begin_inset Newline newline
7515 \begin_inset Newline newline
7519 \begin_inset Newline newline
7522 When is it? What is today?
7525 \begin_layout Standard
7529 \begin_inset space ~
7535 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7537 the largest block of text on a single line.
7538 Here's an example of the
7545 \begin_layout Address
7547 \begin_inset Newline newline
7550 Where do I send this
7551 \begin_inset Newline newline
7554 Your post office and country
7557 \begin_layout Standard
7558 As you can see, both
7565 \begin_inset space ~
7570 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7575 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7576 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7582 This makes sense, since
7590 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7591 Thus, you have to use
7598 arg "newline-insert newline"
7604 \begin_inset space ~
7607 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
7609 \begin_inset space ~
7618 menu) to start a new line in an
7625 \begin_inset space ~
7633 \begin_layout Subsection
7637 \begin_layout Standard
7638 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7639 or list of references.
7641 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7648 \begin_inset Index idx
7651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7660 \begin_layout Standard
7665 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7666 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7667 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7668 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7672 in anything else or vice versa.
7678 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7679 The book document classes ignores the
7683 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7687 in a letter document class.
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7695 environment does several things for you.
7696 First, it puts the centered label
7697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7705 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7707 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7708 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7709 the subsequent text.
7710 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7712 The appearance in the output depends on the used article or report class.
7715 \begin_layout Standard
7716 Starting a new paragraph by hitting
7720 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7721 The new paragraph will still be in the
7726 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7727 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7731 \begin_inset Float figure
7736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7738 \begin_inset Graphics
7739 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
7746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7747 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7752 name "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 We'd love to give you directly an example of the
7778 environment, but since this document is in the
7779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7786 class, we can't do this.
7787 We inserted it therefore as figure
7788 \begin_inset space ~
7792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7794 reference "cap:Paragraph-in-the"
7799 If you've never heard of an
7800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7807 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7816 \begin_inset Index idx
7819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7828 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7835 \begin_layout Standard
7840 environment is used to list references.
7841 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7842 only use it at the end of the document.
7847 in anything else or vice versa won't work.
7850 \begin_layout Standard
7851 When you first open a
7855 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7856 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7872 depending on the document class.
7873 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7874 Each paragraph of the
7878 environment is a bibliography entry.
7883 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7884 Each new paragraph is still in the
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7893 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7895 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7897 handling, have a look at in section
7898 \begin_inset space ~
7902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7904 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7911 \begin_layout Subsection
7916 \begin_inset Index idx
7919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7920 Paragraph ! \SpecialChar LyX
7927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7929 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7936 \begin_layout Standard
7942 environment is another \SpecialChar LyX
7944 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7949 key as a fixed whitespace;
7953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7966 \begin_inset space ~
7971 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7976 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
7978 If you need to insert blank lines, you'll still need to use
7981 arg "newline-insert newline"
7998 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7999 So, when you finish using the
8004 environment, you'll need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8005 Also, you can nest the
8010 environment inside of others.
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8014 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8017 \begin_layout Itemize
8021 arg "newline-insert newline"
8024 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8029 \begin_inset space \space{}
8039 arg "newline-insert newline"
8045 \begin_layout Itemize
8049 arg "newline-insert newline"
8057 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8064 \begin_layout Itemize
8069 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
8076 \begin_layout Itemize
8080 arg "space-insert protected"
8087 \begin_layout Itemize
8088 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8089 You must put at least one
8093 in any line you want blank.
8094 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8099 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8103 since that will insert
8108 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8111 arg "self-insert \""
8117 \begin_layout Standard
8121 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8125 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8129 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8133 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8137 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8138 printf("Hello World!
8143 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8147 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8152 This is just the standard
8153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8164 \begin_layout Standard
8170 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
8171 rc-files, and so on.
8172 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8173 as if you used a typewriter.
8174 \begin_inset Index idx
8177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8178 Paragraph environments|)
8183 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8186 Program Code Listings
8195 \begin_layout Section
8196 Nesting Environments
8197 \begin_inset Index idx
8200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8201 Nesting ! Environments
8207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8216 \begin_layout Subsection
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8222 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8224 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8226 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8228 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8240 \begin_layout Enumerate
8244 \begin_layout Enumerate
8246 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8253 \begin_layout Enumerate
8257 \begin_layout Enumerate
8262 \begin_layout Enumerate
8266 \begin_layout Standard
8267 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8268 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8271 \begin_inset space ~
8275 \begin_inset space ~
8283 \begin_inset space ~
8287 \begin_inset space ~
8296 menu to change the nesting depth of the current paragraph (the status bar
8297 will tell you how far you are nested).
8298 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8301 arg "depth-increment"
8307 arg "depth-decrement"
8310 or the convenient key bindings
8321 arg "depth-increment"
8327 arg "depth-decrement"
8330 to change the nesting level.
8331 The change will work on the current selection if you have made one (allowing
8332 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8336 \begin_layout Standard
8337 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8338 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8339 If it's invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8340 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8341 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8344 \begin_layout Standard
8345 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8347 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8349 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8352 \begin_layout Subsection
8353 What You Can and Can't Nest
8356 \begin_layout Standard
8357 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8358 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8362 The question if nesting a paragraph environment is possible, is a bit more
8363 complicated than a simple yes or no.
8364 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8367 \begin_layout Itemize
8368 Completely unnestable
8371 \begin_layout Itemize
8372 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8376 \begin_layout Itemize
8377 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8381 \begin_layout Standard
8382 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8383 environments have them:
8386 \begin_layout Description
8387 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8388 Can't nest into them.
8389 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8396 \begin_layout Itemize
8402 \begin_layout Itemize
8408 \begin_layout Itemize
8414 \begin_layout Itemize
8420 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 \begin_layout Description
8429 \begin_inset space ~
8432 Nestable You can nest them.
8433 You can nest other things into them.
8434 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8441 \begin_layout Itemize
8447 \begin_layout Itemize
8453 \begin_layout Itemize
8459 \begin_layout Itemize
8465 \begin_layout Itemize
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8477 \begin_layout Itemize
8483 \begin_layout Itemize
8491 \begin_layout Description
8492 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8493 You can't nest anything into them.
8494 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8501 \begin_layout Itemize
8507 \begin_layout Itemize
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8519 \begin_layout Itemize
8525 \begin_layout Itemize
8531 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 \begin_layout Itemize
8543 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 \begin_layout Itemize
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_inset space ~
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Standard
8597 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8605 Although it is possible to nest numbered section headings like
8614 \begin_inset space ~
8618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8622 \begin_inset space \space{}
8625 lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create
8626 well structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested
8627 section headings violate this.
8635 \begin_layout Subsection
8636 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8637 \begin_inset Index idx
8640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8641 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8649 \begin_layout Standard
8650 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8651 affected by nesting anyhow.
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Standard
8669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8677 Figures and tables in
8681 are not affected by this.
8686 Have a look at section
8687 \begin_inset space ~
8691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8693 reference "sec:Floats"
8697 for more information about
8704 \begin_layout Standard
8706 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8707 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8711 \begin_layout Standard
8712 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8720 of its own, it behaves just like a
8721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8728 paragraph environment.
8729 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8733 \begin_layout Standard
8734 Here's an example with a table:
8737 \begin_layout Enumerate
8739 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8746 \begin_layout Enumerate
8747 This is (a) and it's nested.
8748 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8755 \begin_layout Standard
8756 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8762 \begin_layout Standard
8764 \begin_inset Tabular
8765 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8766 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8768 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8853 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8860 \begin_layout Enumerate
8862 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8866 \begin_layout Enumerate
8870 \begin_layout Standard
8871 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8874 \begin_layout Enumerate
8876 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
8883 \begin_layout Enumerate
8884 This is (a) and it's nested.
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8889 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8897 \begin_inset Tabular
8898 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8899 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8900 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8901 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8985 \begin_layout Standard
8986 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8992 \begin_layout Enumerate
8999 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9002 \begin_layout Enumerate
9006 \begin_layout Standard
9007 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9011 \begin_layout Standard
9012 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9015 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9018 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 This is (a) and it's nested.
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9032 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9038 \begin_layout Standard
9040 \begin_inset Tabular
9041 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9042 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9043 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9128 \begin_layout Standard
9129 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9135 \begin_layout Enumerate
9137 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9145 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9156 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9157 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9161 \begin_layout Subsection
9162 Usage and General Features
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9167 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9176 is the innermost possible depth.
9177 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9181 level #1 – outermost
9182 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9198 \begin_layout Enumerate
9200 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9207 \begin_layout Enumerate
9209 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9216 \begin_layout Itemize
9218 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9225 \begin_layout Itemize
9234 \begin_layout Standard
9235 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9236 both of them in the example.
9237 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9247 For example, if we tried to nest another
9252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9259 , we would get errors.
9262 \begin_layout Subsection
9264 \begin_inset Index idx
9267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9276 \begin_layout Standard
9277 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9278 We have several examples of nested environments.
9279 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9284 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9287 \begin_layout Labeling
9288 \labelwidthstring MMM
9289 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9295 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9302 \begin_layout Labeling
9303 \labelwidthstring MMM
9304 #2-a This is level #2.
9305 We created it by using
9308 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9314 arg "depth-increment"
9318 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9325 \begin_layout Labeling
9326 \labelwidthstring MMM
9327 #3-a This is level #3.
9328 This time, we just hit
9335 arg "depth-increment"
9339 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9349 arg "depth-increment"
9353 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9360 \begin_layout Standard
9365 environment, nested inside of
9366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9374 So, it's at level #4.
9375 We did this by hitting
9378 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9384 arg "depth-increment"
9387 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9392 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9408 \begin_layout Standard
9413 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9416 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9422 \begin_layout Labeling
9423 \labelwidthstring MMM
9424 #4-a This is level #4.
9428 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9431 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9436 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9440 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9445 keep nesting things inside
9446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9454 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9461 \begin_layout Labeling
9462 \labelwidthstring MMM
9463 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9465 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9472 \begin_layout Labeling
9473 \labelwidthstring MMM
9474 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9475 and this is level #6.
9476 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9480 \begin_layout Labeling
9481 \labelwidthstring MMM
9482 #5-b Back to level #5.
9486 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9492 arg "depth-decrement"
9499 \begin_layout Labeling
9500 \labelwidthstring MMM
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-decrement"
9513 , we're back at level #4.
9517 \begin_layout Labeling
9518 \labelwidthstring MMM
9519 #3-b Back to level #3.
9520 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9524 \begin_layout Labeling
9525 \labelwidthstring MMM
9526 #2-b Back to level #2.
9531 \begin_layout Labeling
9532 \labelwidthstring MMM
9533 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9534 After this sentence, we'll hit
9538 and change the paragraph environment back to
9545 \begin_layout Standard
9546 We could have also used the
9562 environment in place of the
9567 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9570 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9571 Example 2: Inheritance
9574 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9575 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9576 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9579 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9588 arg "depth-increment"
9591 , after which, we'll change to the
9596 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9603 \begin_layout Enumerate
9608 environment, at level #2.
9611 \begin_layout Enumerate
9612 Notice how the nested
9616 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9621 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9625 \begin_layout Standard
9626 We ended this example by hitting
9631 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9635 and reset the nesting depth by using
9638 arg "depth-decrement"
9644 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9645 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9654 \begin_inset Argument 1
9657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9658 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9666 \begin_layout Enumerate
9667 This is level #1, in an
9671 paragraph environment.
9672 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9673 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9680 \begin_layout Enumerate
9685 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9691 arg "depth-increment"
9695 Now, what happens if we nest an
9699 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9700 label be? An asterisk?
9701 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9708 \begin_layout Itemize
9718 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9719 So, its label is a bullet.
9720 (We got here by using
9723 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9729 arg "depth-increment"
9732 , then changing the environment to
9737 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9744 \begin_layout Itemize
9745 Here's level #4, produced using
9748 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9754 arg "depth-increment"
9758 We'll do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9760 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9770 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9775 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9779 , because we are in the
9788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9807 \begin_layout Enumerate
9812 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9813 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9817 \begin_layout Enumerate
9818 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9821 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9824 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9827 \begin_layout Enumerate
9831 arg "depth-decrement"
9834 to decrease the depth after the next
9837 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9844 \begin_layout Enumerate
9846 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9851 \begin_layout Enumerate
9853 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9854 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9858 \begin_layout Enumerate
9859 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9868 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9873 reset the counter for the label.
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9887 arg "depth-decrement"
9890 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9891 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9892 into the twofold-nested
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 The same thing happens if we do another
9904 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9910 arg "depth-decrement"
9913 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9916 \begin_layout Standard
9917 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9922 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9937 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9944 The same rule applies for the
9948 environment, as well.
9951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9952 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9955 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9957 We won't nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into the
9958 same detail with how we did it.
9964 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
9971 \begin_layout Standard
9979 arg "depth-increment"
9986 : level #2) We'll stick an encapsulated description of how we created the
9987 example in parentheses someplace.
9988 For example, the two keybindings are how we changed the depth.
9989 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9990 Either before or after this, we'll put in the level.
9994 \begin_layout Enumerate
9999 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10000 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
10007 \begin_layout Verse
10008 Now we'll add verse.
10009 \begin_inset Newline newline
10012 It will get much worse.
10013 \begin_inset Newline newline
10023 arg "depth-increment"
10033 \begin_layout Verse
10034 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10035 \begin_inset Newline newline
10038 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10039 \begin_inset Newline newline
10045 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10053 \begin_layout Verse
10054 Here comes a table:
10055 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10063 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10069 \begin_layout Standard
10071 \begin_inset Tabular
10072 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10073 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10160 \begin_layout Verse
10164 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10174 arg "depth-increment"
10180 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10190 arg "depth-decrement"
10197 \begin_layout Enumerate
10202 : level #1) This is another item.
10203 Note that selecting a
10207 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10208 3 times to put the table inside the
10216 \begin_layout Quotation
10217 We're now ending the
10221 list and changing to
10226 We're still at level #1.
10227 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10228 The next set of paragraphs is a
10229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10236 We'll nest both the
10243 \begin_inset space ~
10248 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10252 for the letter body.
10256 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10259 to preserve the depth.
10260 Remember that you need to use
10263 arg "newline-insert newline"
10266 to create multiple lines inside the
10273 \begin_inset space ~
10280 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
10287 \begin_layout Right Address
10289 \begin_inset Newline newline
10292 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10293 \begin_inset Newline newline
10299 \begin_layout Address
10301 \begin_inset space ~
10307 \begin_layout Quotation
10308 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10312 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10313 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10314 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10315 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10316 as soon as possible.
10317 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10320 \begin_layout Quotation
10321 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10322 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10323 with your order, along with payment.
10326 \begin_layout Quotation
10327 We thank you again for your patience.
10330 \begin_layout Address
10332 \begin_inset Newline newline
10339 \begin_layout Quotation
10340 That ends that example!
10343 \begin_layout Standard
10344 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10345 gives you a lot of power with just
10347 We could have easily nested an
10368 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10371 \begin_layout Section
10372 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10373 \begin_inset Index idx
10376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10385 \begin_layout Standard
10386 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10387 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10389 more spaces: Spaces of different width and spaces which can or cannot be
10390 broken at the end of a line.
10391 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10395 \begin_layout Subsection
10397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10399 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10404 \begin_inset Index idx
10407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 \begin_layout Standard
10417 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10418 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10419 ) not to break the line at
10421 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky linebreaks, like in:
10424 \begin_layout Quote
10425 Further documentation is given in section
10426 \begin_inset Newline newline
10430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10432 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10456 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10465 A protected space is set with
10467 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10468 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10472 \begin_inset space ~
10482 arg "space-insert protected"
10488 \begin_layout Subsection
10490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10492 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10497 \begin_inset Index idx
10500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10501 Spacing ! Horizontal
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10510 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10513 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10517 The length units are listed in Appendix
10518 \begin_inset space ~
10522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10524 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
10531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10535 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10540 \begin_inset Index idx
10543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10544 Spaces ! Inter-word
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10558 \begin_inset space \space{}
10561 English) have the typographical convention to add extra space after an end-of-se
10562 ntence punctuation mark, and \SpecialChar LyX
10563 honors those conventions (see section
10564 \begin_inset space ~
10568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10570 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10575 Sometimes, you want a normal space nevertheless.
10576 In this case, insert an inter-word space (shortcut
10579 arg "space-insert normal"
10585 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10589 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10594 \begin_inset Index idx
10597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10606 \begin_layout Standard
10608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10615 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10624 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10625 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance
10626 inside abbreviations:
10629 \begin_layout Quote
10631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10635 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10638 \begin_layout Standard
10639 or between values and units.
10640 Compare for example this:
10641 \begin_inset Newline newline
10645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10649 \begin_inset Newline newline
10652 10 kg (normal space
10655 \begin_layout Standard
10656 You can insert thin spaces also with the menu
10658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10659 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10661 \begin_inset space ~
10669 arg "space-insert thin"
10675 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10679 name "subsec:More-Spaces"
10686 \begin_layout Standard
10687 You can furthermore insert the following space types:
10690 \begin_layout Description
10692 \begin_inset space ~
10696 \begin_inset space ~
10699 space A line with a
10700 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10704 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10708 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10711 Negative thin space between the arrows.
10714 \begin_layout Description
10716 \begin_inset space ~
10720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10724 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10728 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10732 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10739 em) space between the arrows.
10742 \begin_layout Description
10744 \begin_inset space ~
10748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10752 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10756 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10760 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10764 \begin_inset space ~
10768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10771 em) space between the arrows.
10774 \begin_layout Description
10776 \begin_inset space ~
10780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10784 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10788 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10792 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10796 \begin_inset space ~
10800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10803 em) space between the arrows.
10806 \begin_layout Description
10808 \begin_inset space ~
10812 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10816 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10821 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10828 cm space between the arrows.
10831 \begin_layout Standard
10833 \begin_inset space ~
10837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10839 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10843 lists the different space sizes.
10846 \begin_layout Standard
10847 \begin_inset Float table
10852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10854 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10859 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10863 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10873 \begin_inset Tabular
10874 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10875 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10877 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11100 \begin_inset Index idx
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11112 \begin_layout Standard
11113 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11114 feature for adding extra space
11115 in a uniform fashion.
11116 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11117 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11118 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11119 equally between themselves.
11123 \begin_layout Standard
11124 Here a few examples what you can do with them:
11127 \begin_layout Quote
11129 This is on the left side
11130 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11133 This is on the right
11136 \begin_layout Quote
11139 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11143 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11149 \begin_layout Quote
11152 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11156 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11160 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11166 \begin_layout Standard
11167 That was an example in the
11173 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11177 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11181 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11184 is one in a standard paragraph.
11185 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11189 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11192 \begin_layout Standard
11193 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11196 \begin_inset space ~
11201 in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11204 \begin_layout Standard
11206 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11210 \begin_inset space ~
11216 \begin_layout Standard
11218 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11222 \begin_inset space ~
11228 \begin_layout Standard
11230 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11234 \begin_inset space ~
11240 \begin_layout Standard
11242 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11246 \begin_inset space ~
11252 \begin_layout Standard
11254 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11258 \begin_inset space ~
11264 \begin_layout Standard
11266 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11270 \begin_inset space ~
11276 \begin_layout Standard
11277 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11289 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11291 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11292 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11296 option in the space dialog.
11304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11308 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11313 \begin_inset Index idx
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11325 \begin_layout Standard
11326 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11328 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11332 \begin_inset space \space{}
11335 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11338 \begin_layout Standard
11339 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11342 What is correct English?:
11343 \begin_inset Newline newline
11347 \begin_inset Newline newline
11351 \begin_inset space ~
11354 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11355 \begin_inset Newline newline
11359 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11370 \begin_inset Newline newline
11374 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11385 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11392 So that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11397 \begin_inset space ~
11401 \begin_inset space ~
11405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11409 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11412 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11416 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11422 \begin_inset space ~
11426 \begin_inset space ~
11430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11433 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11442 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11443 That is why it is named
11444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11452 The normal phantom ouputs the width and heigth of the content as space,
11453 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11457 \begin_layout Subsection
11459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11461 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11466 \begin_inset Index idx
11469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11478 \begin_layout Standard
11479 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11481 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11482 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11484 \begin_inset space ~
11490 There you find the following sizes:
11493 \begin_layout Standard
11506 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11507 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11512 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11514 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11518 \begin_inset Index idx
11521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11522 Document ! Settings
11527 for the paragraph separation.
11528 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11539 \begin_layout Standard
11545 \begin_inset Index idx
11548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11554 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11555 An example: You have only two short paragraphs on one page with a vfill
11557 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11558 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11567 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 s are described in section
11577 \begin_inset space ~
11581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11583 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11592 If there are several
11596 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11597 You can therefore use
11601 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11604 \begin_layout Standard
11609 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11610 \begin_inset space ~
11614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11616 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11634 When the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11635 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11647 \begin_layout Subsection
11648 Paragraph Alignment
11651 \begin_layout Standard
11652 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11658 There are five possibilities:
11661 \begin_layout Itemize
11669 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11675 \begin_layout Itemize
11683 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11689 \begin_layout Itemize
11697 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11703 \begin_layout Itemize
11711 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11717 \begin_layout Itemize
11725 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11731 \begin_layout Standard
11732 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11733 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11734 the left and right margins.
11735 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11736 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
11742 \begin_layout Standard
11744 This paragraph is right aligned,
11747 \begin_layout Standard
11749 this one is centered,
11752 \begin_layout Standard
11754 this one is left aligned.
11757 \begin_layout Subsection
11759 \begin_inset Index idx
11762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 Page breaks ! Forced
11769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11771 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11778 \begin_layout Standard
11779 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11780 does the pagebreaks in your document, you can
11781 force a page break where you want one.
11782 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11783 is good at page breaking.
11784 Only if you use a lot of
11788 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11789 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11792 \begin_layout Standard
11793 We recommend not to use forced pagebreaks until the text is finished and
11794 until you have checked in the preview to see if you
11798 have to change the page breaking.
11801 \begin_layout Standard
11802 There are two types of pagebreaks: One that ends the page without any special
11804 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11806 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11809 \begin_inset space ~
11815 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11818 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11820 \begin_inset space ~
11825 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11827 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11828 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11831 \begin_layout Standard
11832 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11833 at the top of a page.
11834 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11836 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11837 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11838 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11842 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11846 to learn more about
11853 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11857 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11862 \begin_inset Index idx
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11866 Page breaks ! Clear
11874 \begin_layout Standard
11875 Rather than forced pagebreaks where the content behind the break is placed
11876 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11877 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11878 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed behind
11879 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11882 \begin_layout Standard
11883 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11886 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11888 \begin_inset space ~
11894 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11897 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11899 \begin_inset space ~
11903 \begin_inset space ~
11908 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11909 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11912 \begin_layout Subsection
11914 \begin_inset Index idx
11917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11926 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11933 \begin_layout Standard
11934 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: One that simply
11936 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11938 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11939 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11941 \begin_inset space ~
11945 \begin_inset space ~
11953 arg "newline-insert newline"
11957 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11960 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11962 \begin_inset space ~
11966 \begin_inset space ~
11971 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11973 This is necessary to avoid
11974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11981 in justified paragraphs due to whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11984 \begin_layout Standard
11985 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
11986 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
11988 very good at line breaking.
11989 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to actively
11990 set a line break, e.
11991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11995 \begin_inset space \space{}
11998 in a poem or for an address (see sections
11999 \begin_inset space ~
12003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12005 reference "sec:Quote"
12010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12012 reference "sec:Verse"
12017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12019 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12026 \begin_layout Subsection
12028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12030 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12035 \begin_inset Index idx
12038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12049 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12060 \begin_layout Standard
12063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12064 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12066 \begin_inset space ~
12071 you can insert horizontal lines.
12072 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12073 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12074 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12079 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12090 \begin_layout Standard
12094 \begin_layout Section
12095 Characters and Symbols
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12100 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter e.
12101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12105 \begin_inset space \space{}
12108 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12116 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12120 for information on how this is done.
12123 \begin_layout Standard
12124 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12129 dialog via the menu
12131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12132 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12138 \begin_layout Standard
12139 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12147 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12148 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12150 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12158 \begin_layout Section
12159 Fonts and Text Styles
12160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12162 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12169 \begin_layout Subsection
12171 \begin_inset Index idx
12174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12184 There are two types of fonts:
12187 \begin_layout Description
12189 \begin_inset space ~
12193 \begin_inset Index idx
12196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12202 are fonts, built from outlines of the single glyphs (i.
12203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12207 characters) in the font.
12208 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12209 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12210 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12211 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12212 This means that outline fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12213 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12214 to provide a good image, it might be hard to provide a good rendering.
12215 \begin_inset Newline newline
12218 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12219 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12220 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12221 sizes than at small ones.
12222 \begin_inset Newline newline
12236 \begin_inset space ~
12244 \begin_layout Description
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset Index idx
12253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12259 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start, so they
12260 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12261 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12262 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12263 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in a
12264 picture manipulation program.
12265 In order to relieve this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12266 several fixed sizes typically from around 8 pixels high up to 34 pixels
12267 or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12268 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12269 to display each glyph, so bitmap fonts are thus faster displayed than scalable
12271 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12272 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12273 \begin_inset Newline newline
12276 Bitmap fonts are named
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12284 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12287 \begin_layout Standard
12288 The result of all this, is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they
12289 are designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12290 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12291 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12292 use scalable fonts.
12295 \begin_layout Standard
12296 To test which fonts are used in a PDF-document, you can have a look into
12297 its document properties.
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12302 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12303 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12304 font to emphasize text, you use an
12305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12313 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12315 In \SpecialChar LyX
12316 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12320 \begin_layout Subsection
12323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12325 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12332 \begin_layout Standard
12333 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12334 uses its own fonts.
12335 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12336 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12339 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12340 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12341 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12342 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited, compared
12343 to usual word processors.
12344 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12345 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12346 files are very portable across
12347 different machines.
12348 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12349 was increased a lot
12350 meanwhile so that you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
12351 In \SpecialChar LyX
12352 , only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12354 \begin_inset space ~
12358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12360 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12365 However, all others are available if you enter the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
12367 the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12371 \begin_layout Standard
12372 Furthermore, recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12373 engines that are also
12374 able to directly access fonts that are installed for your operating system
12375 (OS), namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12376 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12378 Both engines are now supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12380 By using them, you can use theoretically any OpenType or TrueType font
12381 that is installed on your system.
12382 The next section describes how to use these OS fonts.
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12386 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12394 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12395 es; so you might have to experiment.
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12413 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12414 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12415 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12416 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12425 \begin_layout Subsection
12426 Document Font and Font size
12427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12429 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12434 \begin_inset Index idx
12437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12444 \begin_inset Index idx
12447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12456 \begin_layout Standard
12457 You can set the document fonts in the
12459 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12463 \begin_inset Index idx
12466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12467 Document ! Settings
12473 There you can specify which font should be used for the three different
12474 font shapes roman (serif),
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12489 \begin_layout Standard
12490 The possible options for the font include
12494 and a list of fonts available on your system.
12499 uses the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12507 \begin_inset space ~
12513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12526 European Computer Modern
12529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12539 \begin_layout Standard
12548 are bitmap fonts, they often looks pixelated in PDF output, especially
12549 when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12557 \begin_inset space ~
12562 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12568 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12569 There are three ways to use one:
12572 \begin_layout Itemize
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12581 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12594 \begin_inset space ~
12599 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12600 community in order to replace
12604 as the default font.
12605 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12606 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12609 \begin_inset space ~
12622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12623 One difference is improved kerning.
12631 \begin_layout Itemize
12635 \begin_inset space ~
12639 \begin_inset space ~
12644 fonts in (the rare) case that
12647 \begin_inset space ~
12652 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12667 Virtual means that it
12668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12679 -glyphs from other fonts.
12680 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12702 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12708 \begin_inset Index idx
12711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12715 -packages ! aeguill
12720 with the document preamble line
12721 \begin_inset Newline newline
12728 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12729 \begin_inset Newline newline
12734 will fix the guillemet problem.
12739 and that accented characters are not
12743 glyph, but build of
12747 characters, the accent and the letter.
12748 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12754 If you search for example for the French word
12755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12762 in a PDF, you won't get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches for
12764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12771 and not for the glyph
12772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12776 \begin_inset space ~
12780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12786 \begin_layout Itemize
12787 If you do not like the look of
12795 , you can of course select one of the other provided vector fonts, e.
12796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12800 \begin_inset space ~
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12818 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12819 \begin_inset space ~
12822 serif and typewriter fonts
12826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12827 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12834 \begin_inset space ~
12843 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12848 \begin_inset space \space{}
12856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12860 \begin_inset space \space{}
12866 \begin_inset space ~
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12884 , but you can also select your own.
12885 \begin_inset Newline newline
12888 The differences between roman,
12891 \begin_inset space ~
12900 fonts are explained in section
12901 \begin_inset space ~
12905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12907 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12912 \begin_inset Newline newline
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12923 was originally designed for newspapers.
12924 That means its glyphs are smaller than the ones from other fonts to fit
12925 into the small newspaper columns.
12929 \begin_inset space ~
12934 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12937 \begin_layout Standard
12938 For the font size there are four possible values:
12955 depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12956 -system, normally it is equal to the font size 10.
12959 \begin_layout Standard
12960 The font sizes are the
12965 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
12966 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
12967 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12968 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12977 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12984 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12991 \begin_layout Standard
12996 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12997 a font to display the script characters.
13001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13002 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13008 So this has no effect for the document language
13024 \begin_layout Standard
13025 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13029 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13037 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13042 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13043 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13045 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13047 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13050 dialog, see section
13051 \begin_inset space ~
13055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13057 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13069 \begin_layout Subsection
13070 Using Different Character Styles
13071 \begin_inset Index idx
13074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13081 \begin_inset Index idx
13084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13093 \begin_layout Standard
13094 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13095 automatically changes the character style for certain
13096 paragraph environments.
13098 supports two character styles,
13107 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
13111 \begin_layout Standard
13116 style, do one of the following:
13119 \begin_layout Itemize
13120 click on the toolbar button
13129 \begin_layout Itemize
13130 use the key binding
13139 \begin_layout Standard
13140 These commands are all toggles.
13145 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13148 \begin_layout Standard
13149 One typically uses the
13153 style for proper names.
13155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13162 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13170 \begin_layout Standard
13171 A more widely used character style is the
13176 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13183 \begin_layout Itemize
13184 clicking on the toolbar button
13193 \begin_layout Itemize
13194 using the keybindings
13203 \begin_layout Standard
13208 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13210 use a different font.
13213 \begin_layout Standard
13214 We've been using the
13218 style all over the place in this document.
13219 Here's one more example:
13222 \begin_layout Quotation
13225 Don't overuse character styles!
13228 \begin_layout Standard
13229 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13230 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13231 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13232 the common tendency to overuse character style.
13236 \begin_layout Standard
13237 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13245 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13247 \begin_inset space ~
13255 \begin_layout Subsection
13256 Fine-Tuning with the Text Style dialog
13257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13259 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13264 \begin_inset Index idx
13267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13276 \begin_layout Standard
13277 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning, so
13279 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13280 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13281 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13282 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13283 from ordinary dialog.
13286 \begin_layout Standard
13287 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13288 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13289 \begin_inset Newline newline
13292 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not well readable and
13293 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13296 \begin_layout Standard
13297 To use custom character styles, open the
13299 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13306 dialog or press the toolbar button
13309 arg "dialog-show character"
13313 There are several boxes on this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13314 font property which you can choose.
13315 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13323 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13328 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13329 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13330 environments in a snap.
13333 \begin_layout Standard
13334 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13337 \begin_inset space ~
13349 \begin_layout Labeling
13350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13364 The possible options are:
13365 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13372 \begin_layout Labeling
13373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13378 This is the Roman font family.
13379 Normally a serif font.
13380 It's also the default family.
13390 \begin_layout Labeling
13391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13402 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13414 \begin_layout Labeling
13415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13422 This is the Typewriter font family.
13428 arg "font-typewriter"
13437 \begin_layout Labeling
13438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13443 This corresponds to the print weight.
13445 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13452 \begin_layout Labeling
13453 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13458 This is the Medium font series.
13459 It's also the default series.
13462 \begin_layout Labeling
13463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13470 This is the Bold font series.
13483 \begin_layout Labeling
13484 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13489 As the name implies.
13491 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13498 \begin_layout Labeling
13499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13504 This is the Upright font shape.
13505 It's also the default shape.
13508 \begin_layout Labeling
13509 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13523 s the Italic font shape
13529 \begin_layout Labeling
13530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13537 This is the Slanted font shape
13539 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13540 , this is different from italic).
13543 \begin_layout Labeling
13544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13548 \begin_inset space ~
13555 This is the Small caps font shape
13562 \begin_layout Labeling
13563 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13568 Alters the size of the font.
13569 You'll find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportio
13570 nal to the document font size.
13571 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
13572 the details, but a general description of what
13575 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13582 \begin_layout Labeling
13583 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13604 arg "font-size tiny"
13610 \begin_layout Labeling
13611 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13632 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13638 \begin_layout Labeling
13639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13660 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13666 \begin_layout Labeling
13667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13688 arg "font-size small"
13694 \begin_layout Labeling
13695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13709 It's also the default size.
13713 arg "font-size normal"
13719 \begin_layout Labeling
13720 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13741 arg "font-size large"
13747 \begin_layout Labeling
13748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13769 arg "font-size larger"
13775 \begin_layout Labeling
13776 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13797 arg "font-size largest"
13803 \begin_layout Labeling
13804 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13825 arg "font-size huge"
13831 \begin_layout Labeling
13832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13853 arg "font-size giant"
13860 \begin_layout Standard
13865 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13866 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13868 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13869 — use that instead.
13870 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13873 \begin_layout Labeling
13874 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13879 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13881 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
13888 \begin_layout Labeling
13889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13896 This is text with emphasize on
13899 This might seem like the same as
13903 , but it is actually a bit different.
13909 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13911 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13914 \begin_layout Labeling
13915 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13922 This is text with Underbar on.
13928 arg "font-underline"
13934 \begin_inset Newline newline
13939 Avoid using underbar if you can! It's a hangover from the typewriter days,
13940 when you couldn't change fonts.
13941 We no longer need to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13942 It is only included in \SpecialChar LyX
13943 because some people
13947 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13950 \begin_layout Labeling
13951 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13955 \begin_inset space ~
13960 This is text with Double underbar on.
13964 arg "font-underunderline"
13968 \begin_inset Newline newline
13971 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13972 about double underbar.
13975 \begin_layout Labeling
13976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13980 \begin_inset space ~
13985 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13989 arg "font-underwave"
13993 \begin_inset Newline newline
13996 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13997 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14000 \begin_layout Labeling
14001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14008 This is text with Strikeout on.
14014 arg "font-strikeout"
14018 \begin_inset Newline newline
14021 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has since
14025 \begin_layout Labeling
14026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14033 This is text with Noun on.
14040 , this is a logical attribute.
14041 Normally it's equivalent to
14044 \begin_inset space ~
14053 \begin_layout Labeling
14054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 You can adjust the color of the text with this control.
14060 Notice that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14064 \begin_inset space ~
14069 , which is the default
14070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14077 and means normally black, you can choose between
14110 \begin_inset Index idx
14113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14122 \begin_layout Labeling
14123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14128 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14129 the language of the document.
14130 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14131 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14133 \begin_inset Newline newline
14136 If you have for example a longer German Text in your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14138 the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14139 When using the spell checking (see section
14140 \begin_inset space ~
14144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14146 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14150 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary
14153 \begin_layout Standard
14154 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14155 Once you've chosen a new character style via the
14157 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14159 \begin_inset space ~
14164 dialog, the settings are saved.
14165 You can activate them using the toolbar button
14168 arg "textstyle-apply"
14172 The button lets you toggle the state of your custom character style even
14173 when the dialog isn't visible.
14177 \begin_layout Standard
14178 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14185 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14186 (suppose you just set the shape to
14187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14205 \begin_inset space ~
14217 \begin_layout Standard
14218 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14226 \begin_inset space ~
14238 \begin_layout Itemize
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14251 font, that means every character has the same width, the
14252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14269 \begin_inset Newline newline
14273 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14287 \begin_inset Note Note
14290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14291 For more on phantoms see section
14292 \begin_inset space ~
14296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14298 reference "subsec:More-Spaces"
14308 \begin_inset Newline newline
14314 \begin_layout Itemize
14319 fonts use characters with serifs.
14320 These are the small
14321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14328 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14329 The following example will show the difference:
14330 \begin_inset Newline newline
14334 \begin_inset Newline newline
14339 text without serifs
14342 \begin_inset Newline newline
14345 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14346 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14353 \begin_layout Itemize
14359 This font type is therefore often used for headings and short texts.
14360 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14363 \begin_layout Standard
14364 We conclude with the same warning once again: Don't overuse the fonts.
14365 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14368 \begin_layout Section
14369 Printing and Previewing
14372 \begin_layout Subsection
14376 \begin_layout Standard
14377 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14378 using \SpecialChar LyX
14379 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14380 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14381 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14382 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14384 Additional Features
14389 \begin_layout Standard
14391 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
14394 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
14395 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
14396 we'll only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
14399 is what you use to do your actual writing.
14400 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
14401 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
14402 to turn your writing into printable output.
14403 This happens in two stages:
14406 \begin_layout Enumerate
14407 First, \SpecialChar LyX
14408 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
14410 a file with the extension,
14411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14425 \begin_layout Enumerate
14426 Next, \SpecialChar LaTeX
14427 uses the commands in the
14431 file to produce printable output.
14435 \begin_layout Subsection
14436 Output file formats
14437 \begin_inset Index idx
14440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14449 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
14456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14458 \begin_inset Index idx
14461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14462 File formats ! ASCII
14470 \begin_layout Standard
14471 This file type has the extension
14472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14484 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14488 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 \begin_layout Standard
14496 You can export your document to ASCII by the menu
14498 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14499 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14508 \begin_inset Index idx
14511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14512 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
14521 \begin_layout Standard
14522 This file type has the extension
14523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14534 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14537 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
14538 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
14539 -Errors or to process it manually
14540 with console commands.
14541 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
14542 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
14543 's temporary directory whenever you
14544 view or export your document.
14547 \begin_layout Standard
14548 You can export your document as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14549 -file using the menu
14551 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14552 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14569 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14571 \begin_inset Index idx
14574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14583 \begin_layout Standard
14584 This file type has the extension
14585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14606 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14607 DVIs are used for quick previews and as pre-stage for other output formats,
14611 \begin_layout Standard
14612 DVI files do not contain images, they only link them.
14613 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14614 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the image in the background to make
14615 it visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer when
14617 So we recommend to use PDF for files with many images.
14620 \begin_layout Standard
14621 You can export your document to DVI by the menu
14623 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14624 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14632 \begin_inset Index idx
14635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14636 File formats ! PostScript
14644 \begin_layout Standard
14645 This file type has the extension
14646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14658 PostScript was developed by the company
14662 as a printer language.
14663 The file contains therefore commands that the printer uses to print the
14665 PostScript can be seen as a
14666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14669 programming language
14670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14673 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14678 When you are interested to learn more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14685 \begin_inset Index idx
14688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14690 -packages ! pstricks
14700 Due to this ability, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14704 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14708 Encapsulated PostScript
14709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14712 (EPS, file extension
14713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14725 As \SpecialChar LyX
14726 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
14727 convert them in the background to EPS.
14729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14732 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
14734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14737 conversions whenever you view or export your document.
14738 This will slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
14740 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14741 EPS to avoid this problem.
14744 \begin_layout Standard
14745 You can export your document to PostScript using the menu
14747 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14748 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
14754 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14756 \begin_inset Index idx
14759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14766 \begin_inset Index idx
14769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14778 \begin_layout Standard
14779 This file type has the extension
14780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14796 Portable Document Format
14797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14804 was derived from PostScript.
14805 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14814 implies, it can be processed at any computer system and the printed output
14815 looks exactly the same.
14818 \begin_layout Standard
14819 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14823 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14827 (JPG, file extension
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14855 Portable Network Graphics
14856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14859 (PNG, file extension
14860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14872 You can although use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
14874 the background to one of these formats.
14875 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14876 will slow down your workflow.
14877 So we recommend to use images in one of the three mentioned formats.
14880 \begin_layout Standard
14881 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14883 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
14886 in three different ways:
14889 \begin_layout Description
14890 PDF This uses the program
14894 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14895 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14899 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14900 So this export variant consist of three conversions.
14903 \begin_layout Description
14905 \begin_inset space ~
14908 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14912 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14916 \begin_layout Description
14918 \begin_inset space ~
14921 (pdflatex) This uses the program pdftex that converts your file directly
14925 \begin_layout Description
14927 \begin_inset space ~
14934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14941 X) This uses the program Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14942 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14944 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for
14945 direct font access (see section
14946 \begin_inset space ~
14950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14952 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14957 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts.
14960 \begin_layout Description
14962 \begin_inset space ~
14969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14976 X) This uses the program Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14977 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14978 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14979 is an even newer engine, derived from pdflatex, that also provides
14980 direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
14981 \begin_inset space ~
14985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14987 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14992 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14993 is still work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
14998 \begin_layout Standard
14999 We recommend to use
15002 \begin_inset space ~
15011 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15012 works without problems.
15017 is no longer under development and therefore a bit outdated.
15020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15022 \begin_inset Index idx
15025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15026 FileFormats ! XHTML
15032 \begin_inset Index idx
15035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15044 \begin_layout Standard
15045 This file type has the extension
15046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15058 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15059 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links them, and
15060 when \SpecialChar LyX
15061 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15062 suitable for the purpose.
15063 Math is output as MathML, which renders nicely in browsers that support
15064 it, but not all do.
15067 \begin_layout Standard
15068 XHTML output remains
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15076 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15077 features are supported yet.
15079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15083 and the World Wide Web
15084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15089 Additional Features
15091 manual, for more information.
15094 \begin_layout Standard
15095 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15097 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15098 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15105 \begin_layout Subsection
15107 \begin_inset Index idx
15110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15119 \begin_layout Standard
15122 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15123 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15132 or use the toolbar button
15139 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15140 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15147 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15151 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15159 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15164 Further output formats can be selected via
15166 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15167 View (Other Formats)
15169 or the toolbar button
15170 \begin_inset Graphics
15171 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
15173 groupId toolbarbuttons
15180 \begin_layout Standard
15183 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15184 viewer window using the menu
15186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15191 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15192 Update (Other Formats)
15197 \begin_layout Standard
15200 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
15203 To have a real output, export your document.
15206 \begin_layout Section
15207 A few Words about Typography
15208 \begin_inset Index idx
15211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15220 \begin_layout Subsection
15222 \begin_inset Index idx
15225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15234 \begin_layout Standard
15235 In \SpecialChar LyX
15237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15248 character comes in four lengths: the
15260 , and the minus sign:
15261 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15267 \begin_layout Standard
15268 \begin_inset Tabular
15269 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15270 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
15271 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15272 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15273 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15274 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15303 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15343 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15370 \begin_inset space ~
15373 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15380 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15407 \begin_inset space ~
15410 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15431 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15465 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15471 \begin_layout Standard
15472 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15484 character multiple times in a row.
15485 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15486 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
15489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15519 \begin_layout Standard
15520 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15521 math mode and has a length of its own.
15522 Here are some examples of the
15523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15537 \begin_layout Enumerate
15538 line- and page-breaks
15539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15549 \begin_layout Enumerate
15551 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15561 \begin_layout Enumerate
15562 Oh — there's a dash.
15563 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15573 \begin_layout Enumerate
15574 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15578 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15588 \begin_layout Subsection
15590 \begin_inset Index idx
15593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15602 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
15609 \begin_layout Standard
15610 Words aren't hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
15611 but automatically in the output.
15612 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15618 \begin_inset Index idx
15621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15628 following the rules of the document language
15632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15633 For German readers: That's one of the main differences between the languages
15641 \begin_inset space ~
15645 \begin_inset space ~
15652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15663 \begin_layout Standard
15665 hyphenates almost perfectly, it only has problems with text in the
15669 font and with unusual constructs, like
15670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15678 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
15679 can't break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
15680 This is done with the menu
15682 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15683 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15685 \begin_inset space ~
15691 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15693 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15697 \begin_layout Standard
15698 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15699 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15710 would then see the hyphen
15711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15718 as a hyphenation possibility.
15719 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15720 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15721 as described in section
15722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15725 Prevent Hyphenation
15726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15736 \begin_layout Subsection
15738 \begin_inset Index idx
15741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15751 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15752 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15754 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
15761 \begin_layout Standard
15762 When \SpecialChar LyX
15763 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15764 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
15766 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15772 appropriate amount of space
15773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15777 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15779 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period as a word uses.
15782 \begin_layout Standard
15783 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15784 not work in all cases.
15786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15797 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15798 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15801 \begin_layout Standard
15802 Here are some examples of
15806 abbreviations and the end of a sentence:
15809 \begin_layout Itemize
15814 \begin_layout Itemize
15819 \begin_layout Standard
15820 And here's an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15823 \begin_layout Itemize
15825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15829 this is too much space!
15832 \begin_layout Itemize
15837 \begin_layout Standard
15838 You won't see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15841 \begin_layout Standard
15842 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15845 \begin_layout Enumerate
15849 \begin_inset space ~
15854 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15855 \begin_inset space ~
15859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15861 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
15866 \begin_inset Index idx
15869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15870 Spaces ! inter-word
15878 \begin_layout Enumerate
15882 \begin_inset space ~
15887 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15888 \begin_inset space ~
15892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15894 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
15899 \begin_inset Index idx
15902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15911 \begin_layout Enumerate
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15919 \begin_inset space ~
15923 \begin_inset space ~
15930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15932 \begin_inset space ~
15937 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15938 This function is also bound to
15941 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15947 \begin_layout Standard
15948 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15951 \begin_layout Itemize
15953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15957 \begin_inset space \space{}
15960 this is too much space!
15963 \begin_layout Itemize
15964 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
15968 \begin_layout Standard
15969 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15970 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
15972 will take care of this.
15975 \begin_layout Standard
15976 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
15980 \begin_inset space ~
15986 feature described in section
15988 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
15993 Additional Features
15998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16000 \begin_inset Index idx
16003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16004 Typography ! Quotes
16010 \begin_inset Index idx
16013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16044 \begin_layout Standard
16046 usually sets quotes correctly.
16047 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16048 and use a closing quote at the end.
16050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16058 The keyboard character,
16062 , generates this automatically.
16065 \begin_layout Standard
16066 You can change the behavior of the
16070 key using the submenu
16076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16080 \begin_inset Index idx
16083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16084 Document ! Settings
16092 \begin_layout Standard
16093 You can also select quotes for different languages in the box
16098 There are six choices:
16101 \begin_layout Labeling
16102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16114 Use quotes like this
16115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16123 \begin_inset Quotes els
16127 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16133 \begin_layout Labeling
16134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16137 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16141 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16147 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16151 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16155 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16161 \begin_layout Labeling
16162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16165 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16169 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16175 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16179 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16183 \begin_inset Quotes gls
16187 \begin_inset Quotes grs
16193 \begin_layout Labeling
16194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16197 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16201 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16207 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16215 \begin_inset Quotes pls
16219 \begin_inset Quotes prs
16225 \begin_layout Labeling
16226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16229 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16233 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16239 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16243 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16247 \begin_inset Quotes fls
16251 \begin_inset Quotes frs
16257 \begin_layout Labeling
16258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16261 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16265 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16271 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16275 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16279 \begin_inset Quotes als
16283 \begin_inset Quotes ars
16289 \begin_layout Standard
16290 These settings affect what character the
16297 \begin_layout Subsection
16299 \begin_inset Index idx
16302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16303 Typography ! Ligatures
16309 \begin_inset Index idx
16312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16343 name "subsec:Ligatures"
16350 \begin_layout Standard
16351 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16352 print them as single characters.
16353 These groups are known as
16358 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
16359 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
16361 Here are the standard ligatures:
16364 \begin_layout Itemize
16368 \begin_layout Itemize
16372 \begin_layout Itemize
16376 \begin_layout Itemize
16380 \begin_layout Itemize
16384 \begin_layout Standard
16385 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16388 \begin_layout Standard
16389 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16390 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16398 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16414 To break a ligature, use
16416 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16417 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16419 \begin_inset space ~
16426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16437 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16454 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
16456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16462 \begin_layout Subsection
16464 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16466 \begin_inset Index idx
16469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16481 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16488 \begin_layout Standard
16491 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16495 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
16498 \begin_layout Description
16500 The name of the game.
16503 \begin_layout Description
16505 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
16509 \begin_layout Description
16511 The \SpecialChar TeX
16512 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
16516 \begin_layout Description
16517 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
16518 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16522 \begin_layout Standard
16523 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16529 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16537 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
16538 world to give programs geek version numbers.
16539 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
16540 converges to the number
16541 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16544 : The actual version is
16545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16553 , the previous one was
16554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16565 \begin_layout Subsection
16567 \begin_inset Index idx
16570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16579 \begin_layout Standard
16580 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16581 space between two words.
16582 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16592 for units use the menu
16594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16595 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16597 \begin_inset space ~
16605 arg "space-insert thin"
16611 \begin_layout Standard
16612 Here's an example to show the differences:
16615 \begin_layout Standard
16616 \begin_inset Tabular
16617 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16618 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16619 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16620 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16627 \begin_inset space ~
16631 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16643 space between number and unit
16650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16659 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16671 half space between number and unit
16684 \begin_layout Subsection
16686 \begin_inset Index idx
16689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16690 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16698 \begin_layout Standard
16699 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16701 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16702 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16703 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16704 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16705 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16706 These bits of text became known as
16717 \begin_layout Standard
16718 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
16719 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16720 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16721 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16722 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16723 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
16724 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there to
16725 specifically prevent widows and orphans.
16726 This is the advantage \SpecialChar LyX
16727 has in using \SpecialChar LaTeX
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 There's no way we can go into how \SpecialChar TeX
16733 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
16734 decide to break a page, or how you
16735 can tweak that behavior.
16736 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
16737 books listed in the bibliography [such as
16738 \begin_inset space ~
16742 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16744 key "latexcompanion"
16749 \begin_inset space ~
16753 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16759 ] may have more information.
16760 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16763 \begin_layout Chapter
16764 Notes, Graphics, Tables, and Floats
16765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16767 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16774 \begin_layout Standard
16775 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16780 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16783 \begin_layout Section
16785 \begin_inset Index idx
16788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16804 \begin_layout Standard
16806 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16809 \begin_layout Description
16812 \begin_inset space ~
16815 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16816 \begin_inset Newline newline
16820 \begin_inset Note Note
16823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16824 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16832 \begin_layout Description
16833 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it appears as \SpecialChar LaTeX
16835 when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16838 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16839 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16848 \begin_inset Newline newline
16852 \begin_inset Note Comment
16855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16856 This is text in a note box that only appears as comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
16865 \begin_layout Description
16867 \begin_inset space ~
16870 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16871 set in the document settings under
16873 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
16875 \begin_inset space ~
16881 \begin_inset Newline newline
16885 \begin_inset Newline newline
16889 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16898 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
16899 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
16904 of a comment that appears in the output.
16910 \begin_inset Newline newline
16914 \begin_inset Newline newline
16917 As you can see in the example, the first line of greyed out notes is a bit
16918 indented and greyed out notes can have footnotes.
16921 \begin_layout Standard
16922 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
16930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16934 Right-click on the appearing note box to select the note type.
16937 \begin_layout Section
16939 \begin_inset Index idx
16942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16951 name "sec:Footnotes"
16958 \begin_layout Standard
16960 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
16963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16966 or the toolbar button
16969 arg "footnote-insert"
16981 \begin_inset Graphics
16982 filename ../clipart/footnote.png
16991 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
16992 's representation of your footnote.
17002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17021 label, the box will
17025 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17026 Clicking on the box label again, will close
17039 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply mark it and click
17055 \begin_layout Standard
17056 Here is an example footnote:
17064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17073 \begin_layout Standard
17074 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17075 position where the footnote box is placed.
17076 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17077 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17079 The numbers are consecutive, no matter in which chapter the footnote is
17082 doesn't support other numbering schemes yet, but you can get other schemes
17083 using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17089 ey are described in the
17096 \begin_layout Section
17098 \begin_inset Index idx
17101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17110 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17117 \begin_layout Standard
17118 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17120 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17124 \begin_inset space ~
17129 or the toolbar button
17132 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17135 , you will see a box with the label
17136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17143 appearing within your text.
17144 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17145 's representation of your marginal note.
17148 \begin_layout Standard
17149 At the side is an example marginal note.
17150 \begin_inset Marginal
17153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17154 This is a marginal note.
17162 \begin_layout Standard
17163 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17164 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17165 pages, right on odd pages.
17168 \begin_layout Standard
17169 For further information about marginal notes see section
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17180 \begin_inset space ~
17188 \begin_layout Section
17189 Graphics and Images
17190 \begin_inset Index idx
17193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17200 \begin_inset Index idx
17203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17212 name "sec:Graphics"
17219 \begin_layout Standard
17220 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17221 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17224 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17233 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17237 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17242 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17243 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17245 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17246 \begin_inset space ~
17250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17252 reference "cha:Units-available-in"
17259 \begin_layout Standard
17264 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17265 of the image in the output.
17266 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17270 \begin_inset space ~
17274 \begin_inset space ~
17283 \begin_inset space ~
17287 \begin_inset space ~
17291 \begin_inset space ~
17296 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17297 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17305 \begin_layout Standard
17309 and \SpecialChar LyX
17312 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
17313 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
17315 You can also specify here the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
17320 \begin_inset space ~
17325 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17326 with the image size is printed.
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17330 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17331 The image will appear in the output exactly at the position where it is
17333 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17335 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17341 \begin_layout Standard
17343 \begin_inset Graphics
17344 filename ../clipart/mobius.eps
17346 rotateOrigin center
17353 \begin_layout Standard
17354 If you need image captions and want to reference images, you have to put
17355 the image into a float, see section
17356 \begin_inset space ~
17360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17362 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
17369 \begin_layout Subsection
17371 \begin_inset Index idx
17374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17383 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
17390 \begin_layout Standard
17391 You can insert images in any known file format.
17392 But as we explained in section
17393 \begin_inset space ~
17397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17399 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17403 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17405 uses therefore the program
17409 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17410 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17411 you can use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17412 \begin_inset space ~
17416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17418 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17425 \begin_layout Standard
17426 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17429 \begin_layout Description
17431 \begin_inset space ~
17434 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17435 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17436 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17440 Graphics Interchange Format
17441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17444 (GIF, file extension
17445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17457 \begin_inset Index idx
17460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17492 Portable Network Graphics
17493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17496 (PNG, file extension
17497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17509 \begin_inset Index idx
17512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17544 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17548 (JPG, file extension
17549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17573 \begin_inset Index idx
17576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17607 \begin_layout Description
17609 \begin_inset space ~
17612 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17614 The scaling ability is necessary if you want to create presentations, because
17615 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17616 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17617 \begin_inset Newline newline
17620 Scalable image formats can be
17621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17624 Scalable Vector Graphics
17625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17628 (SVG, file extension
17629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17641 \begin_inset Index idx
17644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17676 Encapsulated PostScript
17677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17680 (EPS, file extension
17681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17693 \begin_inset Index idx
17696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17728 Portable Document Format
17729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17732 (PDF, file extension
17733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17745 \begin_inset Index idx
17748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17755 We say it can be, because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF
17756 or EPS and the result won't be scalable.
17757 In this cases only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17763 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17771 \begin_layout Standard
17772 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only vice
17776 \begin_layout Subsection
17777 Grouping of Image Settings
17778 \begin_inset Index idx
17781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17782 Images ! Settings grouping
17790 \begin_layout Standard
17791 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17793 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17794 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17796 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17797 need to manually change each of them.
17801 \begin_layout Standard
17802 A new group can be set by entering a name in the
17805 \begin_inset space ~
17810 field in the Graphics dialog.
17811 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
17812 by checking the name of the desired group.
17815 \begin_layout Section
17817 \begin_inset Index idx
17820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17836 \begin_layout Standard
17837 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
17840 arg "tabular-insert"
17845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17849 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
17850 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
17851 from the rest of the table.
17852 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
17853 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
17855 Here's an example table:
17856 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
17862 \begin_layout Standard
17864 \begin_inset Tabular
17865 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
17866 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17867 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
17870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
17958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
17996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 \begin_layout Subsection
18074 \begin_layout Standard
18075 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button, which
18076 brings up the table dialog.
18077 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell and row/column respectively
18078 where the cursor is placed currently.
18079 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18080 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18081 done on all of your selection.
18084 \begin_layout Standard
18085 Additionally to the table dialog, the
18088 \begin_inset space ~
18093 helps you in setting table properties.
18094 It appears when the cursor is inside a table.
18097 \begin_layout Standard
18101 \begin_inset space ~
18106 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18107 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18108 current cell respectively.
18109 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18111 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18112 of text, see section
18113 \begin_inset space ~
18117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18119 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18126 \begin_layout Standard
18127 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18128 using the check box
18137 This will merge the cells to
18141 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18142 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18143 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18144 Here's an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18145 in the last row without the upper border:
18146 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
18152 \begin_layout Standard
18154 \begin_inset Tabular
18155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18156 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18158 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18159 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18171 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18180 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18256 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18291 \begin_layout Standard
18292 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18293 -arguments for the table.
18294 They are necessary for special table formatting, like for multirow cells,
18295 explained in the tables section of the
18298 \begin_inset space ~
18304 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18308 degrees counterclockwise.
18309 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18313 \begin_layout Standard
18314 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18322 Most DVI-viewers are
18326 able to display rotations.
18334 \begin_layout Standard
18339 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18344 adds lines for all cell borders.
18347 \begin_layout Subsection
18349 \begin_inset Index idx
18352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18353 Tables ! Longtables
18359 \begin_inset Index idx
18362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 \begin_layout Standard
18372 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18375 \begin_inset space ~
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18388 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18389 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18392 \begin_layout Description
18397 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18398 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable;
18399 except for the first page, if
18402 \begin_inset space ~
18410 \begin_layout Description
18414 \begin_inset space ~
18419 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18420 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18423 \begin_layout Description
18428 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18429 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable;
18430 except for the last page, if
18433 \begin_inset space ~
18441 \begin_layout Description
18445 \begin_inset space ~
18450 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18451 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18454 \begin_layout Description
18455 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18456 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18462 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18465 \begin_inset space ~
18473 \begin_layout Standard
18474 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18475 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18476 of the fact that only the first one is used in the given table row.
18477 The others will then be defined as
18482 In this context, first means first in this order:
18485 \begin_inset space ~
18497 \begin_inset space ~
18503 See the following longtable to see how it works:
18504 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
18510 \begin_layout Standard
18512 \begin_inset Tabular
18513 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18514 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18515 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18516 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18517 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18518 <row endfirsthead="true">
18519 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18525 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18530 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18549 <row endfirsthead="true">
18550 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18561 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18570 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18582 <row endhead="true">
18583 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18603 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18613 <row endhead="true">
18614 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18625 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18646 <row endfoot="true">
18647 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18658 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18667 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18698 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19639 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19648 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19668 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19699 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19761 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19792 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19854 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19916 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19947 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19978 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20628 <row endlastfoot="true">
20629 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20649 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 \begin_layout Subsection
20668 \begin_inset Index idx
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20680 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
20687 \begin_layout Standard
20688 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20689 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20690 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20691 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20695 , etc.), nor set spacing options etc.
20696 for the cell's paragraph.
20699 \begin_layout Standard
20700 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20701 for the column in the table dialog.
20702 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20703 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20705 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
20711 \begin_layout Standard
20713 \begin_inset Tabular
20714 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20715 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20716 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20717 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20718 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 This is longer now.
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
20920 This is longer now.
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 \begin_layout Standard
20952 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
20953 You can cut and paste even more than one row.
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 Note, that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would
20959 not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
20965 Selection with the mouse or with
20969 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
20970 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
20971 the selection from outside the table.
20974 \begin_layout Section
20976 \begin_inset Index idx
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20995 \begin_layout Subsection
20999 \begin_layout Standard
21000 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21001 have a fixed location.
21003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21010 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21018 \begin_inset space ~
21023 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21024 too many notes on the page.
21027 \begin_layout Standard
21028 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21029 Images and tables can be spread evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21030 and pages without text.
21031 As the floating often destroys the context between the text and the image/table
21032 , every float can be referenced in the text.
21033 Floats are therefore numbered.
21034 Referencing is described in section
21035 \begin_inset space ~
21039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21041 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21048 \begin_layout Standard
21049 To insert a float, use the menu
21051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21055 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21056 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21058 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21059 \begin_inset Index idx
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21071 paragraph within the float.
21072 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21073 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21074 left-clicking on the box label.
21075 A closed float box looks like this:
21076 \begin_inset Graphics
21077 filename ../clipart/float.png
21082 – a gray button with a red label.
21085 \begin_layout Standard
21086 It is recommended to insert floats as a separate paragraph to avoid possible
21088 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21091 \begin_layout Subsection
21095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21099 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21104 \begin_inset Index idx
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 Floats ! Figure floats
21118 \begin_layout Standard
21120 \begin_inset space ~
21124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21126 reference "cap:Platypus"
21130 was created using the menu
21132 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21133 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21136 or the toolbar button
21139 arg "float-insert figure"
21143 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21149 or the toolbar button
21152 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21156 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21157 in front of or behind the image and using the menu
21159 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21161 \begin_inset space ~
21166 or the toolbar button
21169 arg "layout-paragraph"
21175 \begin_layout Standard
21176 \begin_inset Float figure
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 \begin_inset Graphics
21184 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21199 name "cap:Platypus"
21203 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21216 \begin_layout Standard
21217 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21219 As described in section
21220 \begin_inset space ~
21224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21226 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21230 , you can simply insert a label in the caption using the menu
21232 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21235 or the toolbar button
21241 and refer to it using the menu
21243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21246 or the toolbar button
21249 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21253 It is important to use references to figure floats, rather than using vague
21255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21262 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
21263 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
21265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21275 \begin_layout Standard
21276 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21277 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21278 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21279 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21280 as described in section
21281 \begin_inset space ~
21285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21287 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
21293 \begin_inset space ~
21297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21299 reference "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21303 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21304 You can also set the images one below the other.
21306 \begin_inset space ~
21310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21312 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21319 reference "fig:Platypus"
21323 are the subfigures.
21326 \begin_layout Standard
21327 \begin_inset Float figure
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21337 \begin_inset Float figure
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21350 name "fig:Undefinable"
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 \begin_inset Graphics
21364 filename ../clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21375 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21379 \begin_inset Float figure
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21385 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21392 name "fig:Platypus"
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 \begin_inset Graphics
21406 filename ../clipart/platypus.eps
21418 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21430 name "cap:Two-distorted-images"
21434 Two distorted images.
21447 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21449 \begin_inset Index idx
21452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21455 Floats ! Table floats
21463 \begin_layout Standard
21464 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21467 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21470 or the toolbar botton
21473 arg "float-insert table"
21477 They have the same properties as figure floats except for the different
21480 \begin_inset space ~
21484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21486 reference "cap:Table-float"
21493 \begin_layout Standard
21494 \begin_inset Float table
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21500 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21505 name "cap:Table-float"
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 \begin_inset Tabular
21520 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21521 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21523 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21524 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21588 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21603 \end{array}\right]$
21611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21636 \begin_layout Subsection
21638 \begin_inset Index idx
21641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21652 \begin_layout Standard
21654 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21655 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21656 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21658 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in chapter
21666 \begin_inset space ~
21674 \begin_layout Section
21676 \begin_inset Index idx
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21688 name "sec:Minipages"
21695 \begin_layout Standard
21697 provides a mechanism to produce essentially a page within a page, called
21699 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21700 \begin_inset space ~
21707 \begin_layout Standard
21708 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
21709 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21715 Right-clicking on the box allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21716 and its alignment within the page.
21717 \begin_inset Separator latexpar
21723 \begin_layout Standard
21725 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21735 height_special "totalheight"
21740 backgroundcolor "none"
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21746 This is a minipage.
21747 The text is set in an italic style.
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
21754 another formatting.
21762 \begin_layout Standard
21763 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21766 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
21770 as described in section
21771 \begin_inset space ~
21775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21777 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
21782 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
21788 \begin_layout Standard
21789 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21799 height_special "totalheight"
21804 backgroundcolor "none"
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21809 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21815 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21819 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21829 height_special "totalheight"
21834 backgroundcolor "none"
21837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21838 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
21839 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
21847 \begin_layout Standard
21848 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
21854 \begin_layout Standard
21855 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can change the box from a minipage
21856 to other box types.
21857 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
21868 \begin_layout Chapter
21869 Mathematical Formulas
21870 \begin_inset Index idx
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 \begin_inset Index idx
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21914 name "cha:Mathematical-Formulas"
21921 \begin_layout Standard
21922 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21927 There you'll also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21930 \begin_layout Section
21932 \begin_inset Index idx
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21944 \begin_layout Standard
21945 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
21952 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
21954 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
21955 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
21956 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
21958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21964 \begin_layout Standard
21965 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
21969 \begin_inset space ~
21974 , that appears when the cursor is in a formula.
21977 \begin_layout Standard
21978 There are two main types of formulas: Inline formulas appear within a text
21979 line, like this one:
21982 \begin_layout Standard
21983 This is a line with an inline formula
21984 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
21990 \begin_layout Standard
21991 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in an own paragraph
21993 \begin_inset Formula
22000 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22003 \begin_layout Standard
22005 supports also many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22012 \begin_inset space \space{}
22016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22029 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22030 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22034 So typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22037 \begin_inset space ~
22045 \begin_layout Subsection
22046 Navigating in Formulas
22047 \begin_inset Index idx
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 \begin_layout Standard
22060 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22061 achieved with the arrow keys.
22063 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22064 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22069 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22070 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22074 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22078 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22081 \end{array}\right]$
22089 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22094 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22095 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22098 \begin_layout Standard
22103 , printed in this document as
22104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22125 \begin_inset Note Note
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22129 This command will appear in the output as official character denoting the
22130 space character (visible space).
22135 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22136 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22137 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22142 For example, if you want
22143 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22197 , since in the latter case only the
22200 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22205 will be under the square root sign:
22206 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22212 \begin_layout Standard
22213 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22215 \begin_inset Formula
22217 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22226 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22227 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22230 \begin_layout Subsection
22234 \begin_layout Standard
22235 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22236 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22240 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22241 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22242 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22243 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22244 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
22248 \begin_layout Subsection
22249 Exponents and Subscripts
22250 \begin_inset Index idx
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_inset Index idx
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22272 \begin_layout Standard
22273 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22276 arg "math-superscript"
22282 arg "math-subscript"
22285 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22287 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22290 , type in a formula
22293 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22303 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22309 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22313 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22319 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22325 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22334 , you have to use an extra
22338 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22339 For example, if you want
22340 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22346 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22352 Subscripts are similar: To get
22353 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22367 \begin_layout Subsection
22369 \begin_inset Index idx
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 \begin_layout Standard
22382 Create a fraction with either the command
22391 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22397 \begin_inset space ~
22403 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22404 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22405 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22410 To move back up, press
22415 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22416 \begin_inset Formula
22418 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22421 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22429 \begin_layout Subsection
22431 \begin_inset Index idx
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 \begin_layout Standard
22444 Roots can be created using the
22447 \begin_inset space ~
22455 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22461 arg "math-insert \\root"
22483 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22489 always produces a square root.
22492 \begin_layout Subsection
22493 Operators with Limits
22494 \begin_inset Index idx
22497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22506 \begin_inset Index idx
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22520 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22527 \begin_layout Standard
22529 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22533 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22536 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22537 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
22538 by entering them as you would enter a super-
22539 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22540 The sum operator will automatically place its
22541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22548 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22550 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22554 \begin_inset Formula
22556 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22561 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22565 \begin_layout Standard
22566 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22568 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22569 behind the operator and using the menu
22571 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22572 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
22574 \begin_inset space ~
22578 \begin_inset space ~
22592 \begin_layout Standard
22593 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22602 \begin_inset Index idx
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 \begin_inset Formula
22616 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22621 which will place the
22622 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22634 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22635 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22641 \begin_layout Standard
22642 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22649 Have a look at section
22650 \begin_inset space ~
22654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22656 reference "subsec:Functions"
22660 for an explanation of function macros.
22663 \begin_layout Subsection
22665 \begin_inset Index idx
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 \begin_layout Standard
22680 Most math symbols can be found in the
22683 \begin_inset space ~
22688 under one of several categories; including
22705 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22709 \begin_layout Standard
22710 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22711 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
22712 don't have to use the
22715 \begin_inset space ~
22720 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
22722 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
22725 \begin_layout Subsection
22727 \begin_inset Index idx
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 \begin_layout Standard
22742 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
22748 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
22754 \begin_inset space ~
22762 arg "math-insert \\space"
22766 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
22767 For example, the sequence
22772 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
22775 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
22777 \begin_inset Graphics
22778 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
22783 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
22784 the space marker and enter space again several times.
22785 With every space enter the size will be changed.
22786 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
22787 , because they are negative
22789 Here are two examples:
22792 \begin_layout Standard
22802 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
22808 \begin_layout Standard
22818 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
22824 \begin_layout Subsection
22826 \begin_inset Index idx
22829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22840 name "subsec:Functions"
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22851 \begin_inset space ~
22856 contains under the button
22859 arg "math-insert \\functions"
22862 a number of function macros, such as
22863 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
22867 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
22875 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
22882 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
22883 avoid confusions, because
22884 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
22888 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
22894 \begin_layout Standard
22895 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
22897 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
22901 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
22907 \begin_layout Standard
22908 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
22909 are placed, as described in section
22910 \begin_inset space ~
22914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22916 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
22923 \begin_layout Subsection
22925 \begin_inset Index idx
22928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22939 \begin_layout Standard
22940 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
22942 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
22943 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
22944 commands, for example, to enter
22945 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
22948 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
22949 Our example is entered by typing
22954 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22961 \begin_inset space ~
22965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22967 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
22971 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
22974 \begin_layout Standard
22975 \begin_inset Float table
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22981 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22988 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
22992 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 \begin_inset Tabular
23003 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23004 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23005 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23006 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23007 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23064 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23100 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23136 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23208 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23244 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23280 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23352 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23409 \begin_layout Standard
23410 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23413 \begin_inset space ~
23421 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23424 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23428 \begin_layout Section
23429 Brackets and Delimiters
23430 \begin_inset Index idx
23433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 \begin_inset Index idx
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23456 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23463 \begin_layout Standard
23464 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
23466 For some purposes, using just the keys
23471 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23472 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23473 toolbar delimiter icon
23476 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23480 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23481 \begin_inset Formula
23483 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23491 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23492 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23496 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23499 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23505 \begin_inset Formula
23507 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23515 \begin_layout Standard
23516 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23517 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23521 \begin_layout Standard
23522 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23523 left side and right side.
23524 If you use the option
23527 \begin_inset space ~
23532 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23533 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
23535 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
23540 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
23541 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23544 \begin_layout Standard
23545 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
23546 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
23547 is to go inside the brackets.
23548 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
23553 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
23554 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
23555 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
23559 arg "math-delim ( )"
23565 \begin_layout Section
23566 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
23567 \begin_inset Index idx
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 \begin_inset Index idx
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 \begin_inset Index idx
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 Math ! Multi-line Equations
23605 \begin_layout Standard
23606 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23610 \begin_inset space ~
23618 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
23622 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
23623 Here is an example:
23624 \begin_inset Formula
23626 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23635 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
23636 \begin_inset space ~
23640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23642 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23647 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
23648 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
23649 This alignment is set in the box
23654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23703 for every column as default.
23704 For example, the sequence
23705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23716 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
23717 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
23718 corresponds to the relevant column.
23719 The result will look like this:
23720 \begin_inset Formula
23723 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
23724 column & has & has\,right\\
23725 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
23734 \begin_layout Standard
23735 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
23738 arg "newline-insert newline"
23741 while the cursor is in the matrix.
23742 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
23744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23747 or the math toolbar.
23750 \begin_layout Standard
23751 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
23752 It can be created with the menu
23754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23755 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23757 \begin_inset space ~
23769 Here is an example:
23770 \begin_inset Formula
23784 \begin_layout Standard
23785 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23788 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
23791 arg "newline-insert newline"
23795 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
23800 arg "newline-insert newline"
23803 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
23804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23811 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
23812 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
23813 A new row is created by every further entry of
23816 arg "newline-insert newline"
23820 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
23821 Here is an example:
23822 \begin_inset Formula
23824 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
23825 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
23830 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
23831 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
23832 \begin_inset Formula
23834 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
23842 \begin_layout Standard
23843 The multi-line formula type described here is called
23848 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
23849 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
23850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23852 reference "eq:asquared"
23857 The other types are described in section
23858 \begin_inset space ~
23862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23864 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
23871 \begin_layout Section
23872 Formula Numbering and Referencing
23873 \begin_inset Index idx
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 Math ! Formula numbering
23885 \begin_inset Index idx
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23891 Math ! Referencing formulas
23897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23899 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
23906 \begin_layout Standard
23907 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
23909 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23910 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23912 \begin_inset space ~
23916 \begin_inset space ~
23924 arg "math-number-toggle"
23928 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23929 within parentheses.
23930 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
23931 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
23932 the document class.
23933 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
23934 separated by a dot:
23935 \begin_inset Formula
23945 arg "math-number-toggle"
23948 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
23949 You can only number displayed formulas.
23952 \begin_layout Standard
23953 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
23955 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23956 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23958 \begin_inset space ~
23962 \begin_inset space ~
23970 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
23973 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
23974 \begin_inset Formula
23977 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
23983 To number all lines use the shortcut
23986 arg "math-number-toggle"
23992 \begin_layout Standard
23993 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23996 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
23997 A label is inserted with the menu
23999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24008 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24009 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24010 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24022 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24023 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24024 We inserted in the following example the label
24025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24032 in the second line:
24033 \begin_inset Formula
24035 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24036 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24041 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24042 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24043 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24045 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24047 \begin_inset space ~
24055 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24059 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24060 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24061 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24062 as the formula number:
24065 \begin_layout Standard
24066 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24069 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24076 \begin_layout Standard
24077 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
24078 's cross-reference box are described in section
24079 \begin_inset space ~
24083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24085 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24090 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24098 \begin_layout Section
24099 User defined math macros
24100 \begin_inset Index idx
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 \begin_layout Standard
24116 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24117 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24118 Math macros are explained in section
24121 \begin_inset space ~
24133 \begin_layout Section
24137 \begin_layout Subsection
24139 \begin_inset Index idx
24142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24153 \begin_layout Standard
24154 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24155 To set a font in a formula, use the
24158 \begin_inset space ~
24166 arg "math-insert \\font"
24169 , or enter its command, listed in table
24170 \begin_inset space ~
24174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24176 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24183 \begin_layout Standard
24184 \begin_inset Float table
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24197 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24201 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24211 \begin_inset Tabular
24212 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24213 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24241 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24295 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24349 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24376 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24405 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 \begin_layout Standard
24467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24491 \begin_layout Standard
24492 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24493 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24498 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24499 space when you need a space in the box.
24500 Here is an example where
24501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24512 denotes the set of numbers:
24513 \begin_inset Formula
24515 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
24523 \begin_layout Standard
24524 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24525 You can, for example, put a character in
24534 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24538 \begin_inset Newline newline
24541 So it is better not to use this feature.
24544 \begin_layout Standard
24545 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
24546 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
24550 \begin_inset Newline newline
24553 You can only print them emboldened using the command
24559 , which works like the other typeface commands:
24560 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
24566 \begin_layout Standard
24573 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
24576 \begin_layout Standard
24577 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
24579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24580 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24582 \begin_inset space ~
24590 \begin_layout Subsection
24592 \begin_inset Index idx
24595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 \begin_layout Standard
24607 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
24609 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
24613 \begin_inset space ~
24617 \begin_inset space ~
24625 \begin_inset space ~
24633 arg "math-insert \\font"
24637 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24638 in black instead of blue.
24639 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
24640 Here is an example:
24641 \begin_inset Formula
24644 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
24645 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
24654 \begin_layout Subsection
24656 \begin_inset Index idx
24659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 \begin_layout Standard
24671 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
24672 automatically chosen in most situations.
24690 For most characters,
24698 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
24699 and certain other structures, are set larger in
24704 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
24705 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
24706 thinks are appropriate.
24707 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
24710 arg "math-insert \\style"
24714 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
24715 For example, you can set
24716 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
24719 , which is normally in
24728 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
24732 The four styles are used in the following example:
24735 \begin_layout Standard
24736 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
24740 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
24744 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
24748 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
24754 \begin_layout Standard
24755 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
24756 is set in a particular size with the menu
24758 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24760 \begin_inset space ~
24765 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
24766 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
24767 will be adjusted to correspond.
24768 As an example here is a formula in the font size
24769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24779 \begin_layout Standard
24782 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
24788 \begin_layout Section
24789 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24791 \begin_inset Index idx
24794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24803 \begin_inset Index idx
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 \begin_layout Standard
24819 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
24820 that are in common use.
24823 \begin_layout Subsection
24824 Enabling AMS-Support
24827 \begin_layout Standard
24828 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
24829 the document by selecting the checkbox
24832 \begin_inset space ~
24836 \begin_inset space ~
24840 \begin_inset space ~
24847 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
24851 \begin_inset Index idx
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24857 Document ! Settings
24865 \begin_inset space ~
24871 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
24872 -errors in formulas,
24873 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
24876 \begin_layout Subsection
24878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24880 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24885 \begin_inset Index idx
24888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24891 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24899 \begin_layout Standard
24900 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
24901 provides a selection of different formula types.
24903 allows you to choose between
24924 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
24925 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24931 , for an explanation of these formula types.
24934 \begin_layout Chapter
24938 \begin_layout Section
24940 \begin_inset Index idx
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24954 name "sec:Cross-References"
24961 \begin_layout Standard
24962 One of \SpecialChar LyX
24963 's strengths is cross-references.
24964 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
24966 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
24967 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
24968 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
24971 \begin_layout Enumerate
24975 \begin_layout Enumerate
24976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24978 name "enu:Second-item"
24985 \begin_layout Enumerate
24989 \begin_layout Standard
24990 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
24992 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24995 or by pressing the toolbar button
25002 A gray label box like this:
25003 \begin_inset Graphics
25004 filename ../clipart/label.png
25009 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25011 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25046 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25047 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25063 \begin_layout Standard
25064 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25069 or the toolbar button
25072 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25076 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25077 \begin_inset Graphics
25078 filename ../clipart/reference.png
25083 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25085 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25098 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25102 \begin_layout Standard
25103 As an alternative to
25105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25108 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25113 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25114 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25116 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25128 \begin_layout Standard
25129 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25130 \begin_inset space ~
25134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25136 reference "enu:Second-item"
25143 \begin_layout Standard
25144 It is recommended to use a protected space
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 described in section
25150 \begin_inset space ~
25154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25156 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
25165 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25166 line breaks between them.
25169 \begin_layout Standard
25170 There are six formats of cross-references:
25173 \begin_layout Description
25174 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25177 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25184 \begin_layout Description
25185 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25186 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25198 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25205 \begin_layout Description
25206 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25207 \begin_inset space ~
25211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25212 LatexCommand pageref
25213 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25220 \begin_layout Description
25222 \begin_inset space ~
25226 \begin_inset space ~
25229 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25231 LatexCommand vpageref
25232 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25237 \begin_inset Newline newline
25240 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25241 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25242 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25243 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25244 it prints “on the next page”.
25245 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25248 \begin_layout Description
25250 \begin_inset space ~
25254 \begin_inset space ~
25258 \begin_inset space ~
25261 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25264 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25269 \begin_inset Newline newline
25272 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25278 ; otherwise it behaves like
25282 \begin_inset space ~
25286 \begin_inset space ~
25295 \begin_layout Description
25297 \begin_inset space ~
25300 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25301 \begin_inset Newline newline
25305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25313 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25323 \begin_inset Index idx
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 -packages ! prettyref
25336 \begin_inset Index idx
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25343 -packages ! refstyle
25354 \begin_inset Newline newline
25357 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
25358 -package should be used for this feature by setting
25361 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25365 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25366 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25374 is the default and preferred because
25378 supports only English documents.
25379 The format is specified by using the command
25391 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
25392 preamble of the document.
25393 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25406 ) can be done with this command
25407 \begin_inset Newline newline
25414 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25419 \begin_inset Newline newline
25422 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25424 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25426 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25433 \begin_layout Description
25435 \begin_inset space ~
25438 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25440 LatexCommand nameref
25441 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25448 \begin_layout Standard
25449 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25450 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
25452 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25456 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
25460 \begin_layout Standard
25461 You can only use the style
25465 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25469 is always possible.
25472 \begin_layout Standard
25473 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25474 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25476 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25477 \begin_inset space ~
25481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25483 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25490 \begin_layout Standard
25491 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25495 \begin_inset space ~
25499 \begin_inset space ~
25504 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25505 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25508 \begin_inset space ~
25513 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25514 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25517 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25523 \begin_layout Standard
25524 You can change labels at any time.
25525 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25526 do not need to think about this.
25529 \begin_layout Standard
25530 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
25532 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
25536 \begin_layout Standard
25537 References are described in detail in the section
25538 \begin_inset space ~
25542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25552 \begin_inset space ~
25560 \begin_layout Section
25561 Table of Contents and other Listings
25562 \begin_inset Index idx
25565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25574 \begin_inset Index idx
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25586 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25595 \begin_layout Subsection
25597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25599 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
25606 \begin_layout Standard
25607 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
25609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25610 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
25612 \begin_inset space ~
25616 \begin_inset space ~
25622 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
25624 If you click on it, the
25628 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
25629 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
25630 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
25632 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
25634 \begin_inset space ~
25639 that is described in section
25640 \begin_inset space ~
25644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25646 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
25653 \begin_layout Standard
25654 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
25655 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
25657 \begin_inset space ~
25661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25663 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
25667 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
25669 \begin_inset space ~
25673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25675 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
25679 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
25681 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
25684 \begin_layout Subsection
25685 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
25686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25688 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25695 \begin_layout Standard
25696 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
25698 You can insert them via the
25700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25704 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
25707 \begin_layout Section
25708 URLs and Hyperlinks
25709 \begin_inset Index idx
25712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25721 \begin_inset Index idx
25724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25735 \begin_layout Subsection
25737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25746 \begin_layout Standard
25747 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
25749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25755 \begin_layout Standard
25756 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
25758 \begin_inset Flex URL
25761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25771 \begin_layout Standard
25772 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
25778 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
25782 \begin_layout Standard
25783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25791 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25800 \begin_layout Subsection
25802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25804 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
25811 \begin_layout Standard
25812 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
25814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25817 or with the toolbar button
25824 The appearing dialog has two fields:
25833 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
25834 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
25835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25837 name "LyX's homepage"
25838 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25842 , an Email address like this:
25843 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25845 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
25846 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
25851 , or a link to a file.
25854 \begin_layout Standard
25855 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
25857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25868 to the link target.
25871 \begin_layout Standard
25872 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
25873 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
25874 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
25875 the text style dialog.
25876 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
25880 \begin_inset CommandInset href
25882 name "LyX's homepage"
25883 target "http://www.lyx.org"
25890 \begin_layout Standard
25891 The link text color can be changed, when the option
25895 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
25897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25898 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25902 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
25904 \begin_inset Newline newline
25912 \begin_inset Newline newline
25919 in the PDF Properties dialog.
25922 \begin_layout Section
25924 \begin_inset Index idx
25927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25938 name "sec:Appendices"
25945 \begin_layout Standard
25946 Appendices are created with the menu
25948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25950 \begin_inset space ~
25954 \begin_inset space ~
25960 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
25961 as the appendix part of the book.
25962 This part is marked with a red borderline.
25965 \begin_layout Standard
25966 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
25967 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
25968 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
25969 and the subsection number.
25970 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
25974 \begin_layout Standard
25976 \begin_inset space ~
25980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25982 reference "chap:Credits"
25987 \begin_inset space ~
25991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25993 reference "subsec:Export"
26000 \begin_layout Section
26002 \begin_inset Index idx
26005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26016 name "sec:Bibliography"
26023 \begin_layout Standard
26024 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26026 You can include a bibliography database,
26030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26031 Known under the name
26032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26035 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26045 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26046 manually, using the paragraph environment
26050 , which was described in section
26051 \begin_inset space ~
26055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26057 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
26062 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26063 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26067 use a bibliography database.
26070 \begin_layout Subsection
26071 The Bibliography Environment
26074 \begin_layout Standard
26079 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26081 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26090 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26092 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
26095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26102 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26105 \begin_layout Standard
26106 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26111 or the toolbar button
26114 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26118 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26119 containing the available citations.
26120 Select one or more keys from the list and
26130 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26131 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26135 \begin_layout Standard
26136 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26137 entry with surrounding brackets.
26142 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26143 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26155 \begin_layout Standard
26159 Companion Second Edition
26162 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26164 key "latexcompanion"
26171 \begin_layout Standard
26172 The \SpecialChar LyX
26173 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
26174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26183 \begin_layout Standard
26184 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26187 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26189 \begin_inset space ~
26197 arg "layout-paragraph"
26201 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26204 \begin_layout Subsection
26205 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26207 \begin_inset Index idx
26210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26213 Bibliography ! Databases
26219 \begin_inset Index idx
26222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26225 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26234 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26242 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26248 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26250 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26251 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26256 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26258 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26259 your working field in a database.
26260 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26261 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26262 list for that document.
26263 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26267 \begin_layout Standard
26268 The database is a text file with the file extension
26269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26280 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26281 The format is explained in
26282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26288 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26290 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26292 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26297 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26298 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26299 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
26301 \begin_inset Flex URL
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26314 \begin_layout Standard
26315 To use a database, use the menu
26317 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26322 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26324 \begin_inset space ~
26330 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26331 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26338 Add bibliography to TOC
26340 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26345 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26346 in the document or just the cited references.
26349 \begin_layout Standard
26350 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26362 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26363 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
26364 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26365 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26367 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26373 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26374 \begin_inset Newline newline
26378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26380 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26392 \begin_layout Standard
26393 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26396 \begin_layout Standard
26397 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
26398 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26400 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
26407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26408 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26413 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
26414 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
26415 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
26419 The following variants are possible:
26422 \begin_layout Description
26423 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26424 with other bibliography packages (e.
26425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26429 \begin_inset space \space{}
26436 ), only with the package
26440 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26444 \begin_layout Description
26445 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26446 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26447 with all bibliography packages, except
26452 \begin_layout Description
26453 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
26458 , works with all bibliography packages
26461 \begin_layout Standard
26462 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26463 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26465 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
26468 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26472 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26481 \begin_layout Standard
26482 When you select the option
26484 Sectioned bibliography
26488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26489 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26492 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26493 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26495 Customizing Bibliographies
26499 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26504 Additional Features
26509 \begin_layout Standard
26510 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26511 the two methods of creating them.
26512 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26513 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26514 We used the style file
26518 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26521 \begin_layout Subsection
26523 \begin_inset Index idx
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26529 Bibliography ! Citation format
26537 \begin_layout Standard
26538 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26539 For this feature you need to enable the option
26545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26549 \begin_inset Index idx
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26555 Document ! Settings
26565 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26566 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26567 style files as explained in
26568 the previous section.
26571 \begin_layout Standard
26572 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26573 the citation reference window.
26574 Here is an example where the text
26575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26579 \begin_inset space ~
26583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26586 appears after the reference:
26589 \begin_layout Standard
26591 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26594 key "latexcompanion"
26601 \begin_layout Section
26603 \begin_inset Index idx
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26615 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26624 \begin_layout Standard
26625 An index entry is created if you use the menu
26627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26629 \begin_inset space ~
26634 or the toolbar button
26641 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
26642 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
26643 by \SpecialChar LyX
26644 as the index entry.
26647 \begin_layout Standard
26648 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
26650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26651 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26653 \begin_inset space ~
26659 A light blue box labeled
26660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26671 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
26672 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
26676 \begin_layout Standard
26677 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
26678 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
26679 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
26680 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26682 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26684 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
26691 \begin_layout Subsection
26692 Grouping Index Entries
26693 \begin_inset Index idx
26696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26707 \begin_layout Standard
26708 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
26710 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
26711 lists under the entry
26712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26720 First we create the entry
26721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26729 \begin_inset space ~
26733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26735 reference "subsec:Lists"
26740 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
26741 \begin_inset space ~
26745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26747 reference "sec:Itemize"
26751 , we insert the command
26754 \begin_layout Standard
26760 \begin_layout Standard
26764 \begin_layout Standard
26770 \begin_layout Standard
26771 for the enumerated list in section
26772 \begin_inset space ~
26776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26778 reference "sec:Enumerate"
26785 \begin_layout Standard
26786 The exclamation mark
26787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26794 marks the grouping levels.
26795 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
26796 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
26797 If we don't have an index entry for
26798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26805 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
26808 \begin_layout Subsection
26810 \begin_inset Index idx
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26816 Index ! Page ranges
26824 \begin_layout Standard
26825 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
26827 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
26828 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
26829 an index entry in section
26830 \begin_inset space ~
26834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26836 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
26843 \begin_layout Standard
26846 Paragraph environments|(
26849 \begin_layout Standard
26850 and another entry at the end of section
26851 \begin_inset space ~
26855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26857 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26867 Paragraph environments|)
26870 \begin_layout Standard
26872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26895 respectively start and end the index range.
26896 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
26897 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
26898 the pages of the indexed document parts.
26899 An example is the index entry
26900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26903 Document ! Settings
26904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26910 \begin_layout Subsection
26912 \begin_inset Index idx
26915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 Index ! Cross referencing
26926 \begin_layout Standard
26927 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
26928 We referred for example in the index entry
26929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26937 \begin_inset space ~
26941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26943 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
26947 ) to the index entry
26948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26955 in the same section using the entry
26958 \begin_layout Standard
26961 GIF|see{Image formats}
26964 \begin_layout Standard
26965 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
26967 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
26968 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
26971 \begin_layout Subsection
26973 \begin_inset Index idx
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26979 Index ! Entry order
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26988 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
26989 follow the rules for the index order.
26990 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
26995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26996 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
26998 \begin_inset space ~
27002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27004 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27013 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27014 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27039 \begin_inset Index idx
27042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27045 Dummy entries ! maïs
27051 \begin_inset Index idx
27054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27057 Dummy entries ! maître
27063 \begin_inset Index idx
27066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27069 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27074 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27075 maïs, maison, maître.
27076 To achieve this, we use the command
27079 \begin_layout Standard
27082 previous entry@current entry
27085 \begin_layout Standard
27086 In our case we want to have
27087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27102 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27105 \begin_layout Standard
27111 \begin_layout Standard
27112 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27113 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
27115 See the next subsection for an example.
27118 \begin_layout Standard
27119 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27125 \begin_layout Standard
27126 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27131 to generate the index (see sec.
27132 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27138 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27147 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27148 -package aeguill in sec.
27149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27155 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
27159 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
27160 -packages although all these index
27161 commands start with
27162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27175 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27180 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27183 \begin_layout Standard
27195 \begin_layout Standard
27207 \begin_layout Subsection
27209 \begin_inset Index idx
27212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27215 Index ! Entry layout
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27225 \begin_inset Index idx
27228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27233 This is an italic dummy entry
27238 You can also format the page number using the character
27239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27246 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27247 -command without a backslash.
27248 We can write for example
27251 \begin_layout Standard
27254 italic page number:|textit
27257 \begin_layout Standard
27258 to get the page number in italic.
27259 \begin_inset Index idx
27262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27265 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27270 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
27271 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
27273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27289 \begin_inset space ~
27295 Have a look at section
27296 \begin_inset space ~
27300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27302 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27306 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27310 \begin_layout Standard
27311 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27319 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27323 to generate the index, see sec.
27324 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27330 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27339 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27344 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27348 key "latexcompanion"
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27363 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27364 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27365 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27366 If so, put the following in the preamble
27369 \begin_layout Standard
27381 \begin_layout Standard
27385 \begin_layout Standard
27391 \begin_layout Standard
27392 in the index entry.
27393 \begin_inset Index idx
27396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27399 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27404 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27405 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27406 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27410 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27411 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27412 a bold font for all index entries.
27413 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27425 documentation for details,
27426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27428 key "makeindex,xindy"
27435 \begin_layout Subsection
27437 \begin_inset Index idx
27440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27451 name "subsec:Index-Program"
27458 \begin_layout Standard
27459 If the index generation program
27463 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
27464 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27468 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
27469 distribution, is used.
27473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27479 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27480 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27481 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27482 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27492 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
27494 dialog, see section
27495 \begin_inset space ~
27499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27501 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
27506 The available options are listed and explained in
27507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27509 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
27514 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27518 \begin_layout Standard
27519 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27520 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
27523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27528 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27529 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27532 \begin_layout Subsection
27536 \begin_layout Standard
27537 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27538 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27546 next to the standard index.
27548 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27549 that add this feature.
27556 \begin_inset Index idx
27559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27563 -packages ! splitidx
27568 package to generate multiple indexes.
27569 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
27574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27575 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
27577 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27584 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
27585 style, but it also includes
27586 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27587 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27595 \begin_layout Standard
27596 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
27597 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27600 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27603 and select the option
27605 Use multiple Indexes
27612 already contains the standard index
27613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27621 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27622 also appear as a heading) to the
27626 input field and press the
27631 The new index now also appears in the list.
27632 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
27633 label color to the new index.
27636 \begin_layout Standard
27637 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
27640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27647 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
27648 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
27649 are additional features:
27652 \begin_layout Itemize
27653 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
27654 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
27657 \begin_layout Itemize
27658 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
27659 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
27660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27667 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
27668 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
27669 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
27670 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
27673 \begin_layout Section
27674 Nomenclature/Glossary
27675 \begin_inset Index idx
27678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27687 \begin_inset Index idx
27690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27723 name "sec:Nomenclature"
27730 \begin_layout Standard
27731 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
27732 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
27733 called nomenclature or glossary.
27736 \begin_layout Standard
27737 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27744 \begin_inset Index idx
27747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 -packages ! nomencl
27757 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
27759 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27765 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27769 \begin_layout Standard
27770 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
27771 and then use the menu
27773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27779 \begin_inset space ~
27784 or the toolbar button
27787 arg "nomencl-insert"
27792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27803 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
27806 \begin_layout Standard
27807 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
27808 The first is the term or
27812 that you wish to define.
27817 of the term or symbol.
27820 \begin_layout Standard
27821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27829 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
27830 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
27838 \begin_layout Subsection
27839 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
27840 \begin_inset Index idx
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27846 Nomenclature ! Layout
27854 \begin_layout Standard
27855 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
27859 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
27862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27866 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27874 \begin_inset Newline newline
27882 \begin_inset Newline newline
27888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27895 character starts/ends the formula.
27896 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
27897 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
27899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27909 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
27919 \begin_layout Standard
27920 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27921 -syntax is given in section
27922 \begin_inset space ~
27926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27928 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
27935 \begin_layout Standard
27939 \begin_inset space ~
27944 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27946 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
27947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27951 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
27955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27958 in this document is:
27959 \begin_inset Newline newline
27964 dummy entry for the character
27969 \begin_inset Newline newline
27981 \begin_inset space ~
27991 font use the command
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28021 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28026 \begin_inset space \space{}
28030 \begin_inset Newline newline
28046 \begin_inset Newline newline
28049 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28050 This command will make the font of all symbols
28057 \begin_inset space ~
28065 \begin_layout Standard
28066 If the characters |
28067 \begin_inset space \space{}
28071 \begin_inset space \space{}
28075 \begin_inset space \space{}
28079 \begin_inset space \space{}
28083 \begin_inset space \space{}
28086 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28087 a quote character in front of them.
28088 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28089 LatexCommand nomenclature
28090 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28091 description "The quote sign is output by writing ` \"\"\"\" '"
28098 \begin_layout Subsection
28099 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28100 \begin_inset Index idx
28103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28106 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28114 \begin_layout Standard
28115 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28116 -code of the symbol
28118 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28120 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28123 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28124 LatexCommand nomenclature
28126 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28133 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28137 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28138 LatexCommand nomenclature
28141 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28146 They will be sorted by
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28173 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28176 will be sorted before the
28180 since the character
28181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28188 is considered in sorting.
28191 \begin_layout Standard
28192 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28195 \begin_inset space ~
28200 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28201 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28203 For the example given, you can insert
28207 in this field for the
28208 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28215 will be located before
28216 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28222 \begin_layout Standard
28223 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28228 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28237 \begin_layout Subsection
28238 Nomenclature Options
28239 \begin_inset Index idx
28242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28245 Nomenclature ! Options
28253 \begin_layout Standard
28258 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28259 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28262 \begin_layout Description
28263 refeq Appends the phrase
28264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28279 to every nomenclature entry, where
28285 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28288 \begin_layout Description
28289 refpage Appends the phrase
28290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28305 to every nomenclature entry, where
28311 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28314 \begin_layout Description
28315 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28318 \begin_layout Standard
28319 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28320 class options list in the
28322 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28326 In this document the options
28333 \begin_layout Standard
28334 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28340 \begin_layout Standard
28341 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28342 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28347 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28350 \begin_layout Description
28360 \begin_layout Description
28363 nomrefpage Like the
28370 \begin_layout Description
28373 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28382 \begin_layout Description
28386 \begin_inset space ~
28392 \begin_inset space ~
28397 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28400 \begin_layout Standard
28402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28409 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28410 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28414 \begin_layout Standard
28422 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28425 \begin_inset Newline newline
28432 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28437 \begin_inset Newline newline
28441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28456 by their translation.
28459 \begin_layout Subsection
28460 Printing the Nomenclature
28461 \begin_inset Index idx
28464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28467 Nomenclature ! Printing
28475 \begin_layout Standard
28476 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28478 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28479 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28495 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28496 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28497 You can choose between these settings:
28500 \begin_layout Description
28501 Default a space of 1
28502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28508 \begin_layout Description
28510 \begin_inset space ~
28514 \begin_inset space ~
28517 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28520 \begin_layout Description
28521 Custom custom space
28524 \begin_layout Standard
28525 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28534 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28542 For example, in order to change the name to
28546 , add the following line to the preamble:
28549 \begin_layout Standard
28556 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28559 \begin_layout Subsection
28560 Nomenclature Program
28561 \begin_inset Index idx
28564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28567 Nomenclature ! Program
28573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28575 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
28582 \begin_layout Standard
28588 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28589 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28591 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28596 by adding options, see section
28597 \begin_inset space ~
28601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28603 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28608 The available options are listed and explained in
28609 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28611 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28618 \begin_layout Section
28620 \begin_inset Index idx
28623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28632 \begin_inset Index idx
28635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28638 Document ! Branches
28644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28646 name "sec:Branches"
28653 \begin_layout Standard
28654 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28655 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28656 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28657 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28660 \begin_layout Standard
28661 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
28662 allows you to put text into branches.
28663 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28664 To create a branch, either select the menu
28666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28667 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
28670 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28672 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28679 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28680 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28681 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
28682 and whether the name of the branch should
28683 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28684 (see below for an example).
28685 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28686 to the name of the other) and to add
28687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28699 \begin_inset space ~
28702 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
28703 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
28706 \begin_layout Standard
28707 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
28708 These boxes are inserted via the menu
28710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28713 where you can choose a branch.
28714 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
28718 \begin_layout Standard
28719 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
28720 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
28723 \begin_layout Standard
28724 \begin_inset Branch Question
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28730 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
28738 \begin_layout Standard
28739 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28742 \begin_layout Standard
28745 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
28753 \begin_layout Standard
28760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28761 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28764 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
28765 Consider for example a file
28766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28773 which has the above branches.
28775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28782 is active, the PDF export file would be called
28783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28806 branch were inactive,
28807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28822 branch was active, likewise
28823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28838 branch was active, and
28839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28842 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
28843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28846 if both branches were active.
28847 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
28850 \begin_layout Standard
28851 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28857 \begin_layout Standard
28858 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
28859 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
28860 definitions for each branch.
28861 For example you can define for the question branch
28865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28866 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28867 -syntax, see section
28868 \begin_inset space ~
28872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28874 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28886 \begin_layout Standard
28896 \begin_layout Standard
28906 \begin_layout Standard
28907 and for the answer branch
28910 \begin_layout Standard
28920 \begin_layout Standard
28930 \begin_layout Standard
28931 \begin_inset Branch Question
28934 \begin_layout Standard
28940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28968 \begin_layout Standard
28969 \begin_inset Branch Answer
28972 \begin_layout Standard
28978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29006 \begin_layout Standard
29007 Now it is possible to use the
29011 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29018 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29021 commands to obtain conditional output.
29022 Here is an example formula where only the
29029 \begin_inset Formula
29031 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29039 \begin_layout Standard
29040 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29049 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29055 \begin_inset space \space{}
29058 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29060 For this advanced usage, see the
29065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29068 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29075 \begin_layout Section
29077 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29079 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29084 \begin_inset Index idx
29087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29098 \begin_layout Standard
29101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29105 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29107 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29113 \begin_inset Index idx
29116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29120 -packages ! hyperref
29125 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29126 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29127 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29128 part of the document.
29132 \begin_layout Standard
29133 The header information in the dialog tab
29137 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29138 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29139 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29140 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29144 \begin_inset space ~
29148 \begin_inset space ~
29153 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
29154 tries to extract the header information from your document title
29155 and author entries.
29159 \begin_inset space ~
29163 \begin_inset space ~
29167 \begin_inset space ~
29172 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29175 \begin_layout Standard
29176 You can specify in the dialog tab
29180 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29185 \begin_inset space ~
29189 \begin_inset space ~
29193 \begin_inset space ~
29198 option allows long links to be split;
29201 \begin_inset space ~
29205 \begin_inset space ~
29209 \begin_inset space ~
29217 \begin_inset space ~
29222 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29225 \begin_inset space ~
29230 colors the different links.
29231 The default colors are:
29234 \begin_layout Labeling
29235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29240 for hyperlinks and URLs
29243 \begin_layout Labeling
29244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29252 \begin_layout Labeling
29253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29261 \begin_layout Standard
29262 but you can change these in the field
29267 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29270 \begin_layout Standard
29273 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29276 \begin_layout Standard
29281 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29282 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29283 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29286 \begin_layout Standard
29291 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29292 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29293 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29303 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29304 when opening the PDF.
29306 \begin_inset space ~
29309 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29310 \begin_inset space ~
29313 1 will only display the sections.
29316 \begin_layout Standard
29317 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29318 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29324 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29325 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29334 \begin_layout Section
29336 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29340 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29347 \begin_layout Subsection
29350 \begin_inset Index idx
29353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29363 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29365 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29372 \begin_layout Standard
29373 As \SpecialChar LyX
29374 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
29375 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29376 commands and constructs,
29379 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29380 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29381 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29382 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29383 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
29384 cannot support all packages and
29388 \begin_layout Standard
29389 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
29390 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
29391 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
29395 Code box is created by the menu
29397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29399 \begin_inset space ~
29404 or by the toolbar button
29417 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
29428 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
29430 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29431 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29438 , you can write the command part
29444 in a \SpecialChar TeX
29445 Code box before the word and the closing brace
29449 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
29450 Code box behind the word.
29451 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
29452 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
29456 \begin_layout Standard
29457 \begin_inset Graphics
29458 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
29466 \begin_layout Standard
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29471 This is a line with a
29475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29498 \begin_layout Standard
29499 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29507 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29508 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29509 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
29510 know that the command is finished.
29518 \begin_layout Subsection
29519 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29521 \begin_inset Argument 1
29524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29527 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29534 \begin_inset Index idx
29537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29549 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29556 \begin_layout Standard
29557 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29558 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29559 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
29560 uses in the background.
29561 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
29562 is based on commands, you can
29563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29571 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29572 any time if you know the right commands.
29573 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29574 is the end of the day.
29575 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29576 all caption labels bold.
29577 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29579 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29583 \begin_layout Standard
29584 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
29586 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29588 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29591 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29600 \begin_layout Standard
29601 As result you find that the package
29606 \begin_inset Index idx
29609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29613 -packages ! caption
29619 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29621 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29624 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29628 \begin_inset space ~
29636 \begin_layout Standard
29641 usepackage[options]{package name}
29644 \begin_layout Standard
29645 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
29646 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29647 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29648 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29651 \begin_layout Standard
29652 In your case the package name is
29657 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29662 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29663 So you add the command
29666 \begin_layout Standard
29671 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29680 For more commands provided by the
29684 package, have a look at its documentation,
29685 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29700 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29702 For example if you use a
29706 class, you don't need the package
29710 , you can instead write
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29718 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29724 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29725 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29726 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29733 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29737 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29738 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29740 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29741 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
29742 Code box as described in the previous
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29747 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29748 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29751 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29753 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29760 \begin_layout Standard
29761 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29767 \begin_layout Standard
29771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29781 \begin_inset Note Note
29784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29787 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29795 \begin_layout Left Header
29796 \begin_inset Argument 1
29799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29819 \begin_inset Note Note
29822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29825 defines the header line as described below
29833 \begin_layout Center Header
29834 \begin_inset Argument 1
29837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29846 \begin_layout Right Header
29847 \begin_inset Argument 1
29850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29873 \begin_layout Left Footer
29874 \begin_inset Argument 1
29877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29900 \begin_layout Center Footer
29901 \begin_inset Argument 1
29904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29917 \begin_inset Newline newline
29921 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
29927 \begin_layout Right Footer
29928 \begin_inset Argument 1
29931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29953 \begin_layout Section
29954 Customized Page Headers and Footers
29955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29957 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
29962 \begin_inset Index idx
29965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29968 Document ! Header/Footer line
29974 \begin_inset Index idx
29977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29988 \begin_layout Standard
29989 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
29993 \begin_inset space ~
30004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30010 \begin_inset space ~
30016 As a second step add in the menu
30018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30019 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30026 Custom Header/Footerlines
30027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30031 This module offers the following 6
30032 \begin_inset space ~
30038 \begin_layout Description
30040 \begin_inset space ~
30044 \begin_inset space ~
30048 \begin_inset space ~
30052 \begin_inset space ~
30056 \begin_inset space ~
30062 \begin_layout Description
30064 \begin_inset space ~
30068 \begin_inset space ~
30072 \begin_inset space ~
30076 \begin_inset space ~
30080 \begin_inset space ~
30086 \begin_layout Standard
30087 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30090 \begin_layout Standard
30091 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30092 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30094 \begin_inset space ~
30098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30100 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30104 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30107 \begin_layout Standard
30108 \begin_inset Float figure
30114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30117 \begin_inset Tabular
30118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30119 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30120 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30122 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30124 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30142 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30171 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30182 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30186 The normal text on the page goes here.
30187 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30189 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30190 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30195 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30204 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30233 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30244 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30262 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30280 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30287 name "fig:Page-layout"
30291 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30313 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30317 \begin_inset space ~
30322 is set to “Default”.
30323 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30332 \begin_layout Subsection
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30338 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30339 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30340 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30342 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30343 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30347 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
30348 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30354 \begin_inset space ~
30362 \begin_layout Description
30365 thepage prints the current page number
30368 \begin_layout Description
30371 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30374 \begin_layout Description
30377 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30380 \begin_layout Description
30383 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30384 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30391 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30394 because it usually goes in a left header.
30397 \begin_layout Description
30400 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30401 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30403 It is normally used in the right header.
30406 \begin_layout Subsection
30407 Default header/footer
30410 \begin_layout Standard
30411 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30412 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30413 footer has the page number.
30414 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30415 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30416 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30419 \begin_inset space ~
30427 \begin_layout Subsection
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30432 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30433 Some pages are different.
30434 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30435 a new part or chapter in your book.
30436 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30437 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30438 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30442 Header and footer decoration line
30445 \begin_layout Standard
30446 By default, you get a 0.4
30447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30450 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30451 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30463 in the following way:
30466 \begin_layout Standard
30473 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30477 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30486 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30493 \begin_layout Standard
30494 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30496 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30497 \begin_inset space ~
30501 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30510 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30511 Several header/footer lines
30514 \begin_layout Standard
30515 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30516 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30517 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30519 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30535 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30548 \begin_inset space ~
30556 \begin_layout Standard
30563 headheight}{height}
30566 \begin_layout Standard
30567 where height is a size in standard units.
30568 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30569 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30570 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30571 logfile with the menu
30573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30579 \begin_inset space ~
30584 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30589 \begin_inset Index idx
30592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30596 -packages ! fancyhdr
30602 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30603 for your header/footer.
30606 \begin_layout Subsection
30610 \begin_layout Standard
30611 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30612 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30613 This example consists of the following definition:
30616 \begin_layout Description
30618 \begin_inset space ~
30627 , empty optional argument
30630 \begin_layout Description
30632 \begin_inset space ~
30635 Header empty, empty optional argument
30638 \begin_layout Description
30640 \begin_inset space ~
30649 in the optional argument
30652 \begin_layout Description
30654 \begin_inset space ~
30663 in the optional argument
30666 \begin_layout Description
30668 \begin_inset space ~
30681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30685 \begin_inset Newline newline
30689 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30696 in the optional argument
30699 \begin_layout Description
30701 \begin_inset space ~
30710 , empty optional argument
30713 \begin_layout Description
30716 headrulewidth set to 2
30717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30723 \begin_layout Standard
30724 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30725 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
30731 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30740 \begin_layout Standard
30741 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30747 \begin_layout Standard
30751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30755 pagestyle{headings}
30761 \begin_inset Note Note
30764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 switches back to page style with the default headings
30775 \begin_layout Section
30776 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30779 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30784 \begin_inset Index idx
30787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30796 \begin_inset Index idx
30799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30810 \begin_layout Standard
30812 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
30813 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30814 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30817 \begin_layout Subsection
30821 \begin_layout Standard
30822 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30828 \begin_inset Index idx
30831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30835 -packages ! preview-latex
30840 (on some systems named simply
30845 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30847 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30853 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30855 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30863 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
30864 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30865 -package are automatically
30866 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
30870 \begin_layout Subsection
30874 \begin_layout Standard
30875 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
30876 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30878 activate the option
30881 \begin_inset space ~
30888 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30894 \begin_inset space ~
30898 \begin_inset space ~
30901 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
30908 \begin_inset space ~
30921 \begin_inset space ~
30926 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30930 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30935 \begin_inset space ~
30943 \begin_inset space ~
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
30953 and when you finish
30957 \begin_layout Standard
30958 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30966 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
30967 generated by activating the option
30970 \begin_inset space ~
30976 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
30984 \begin_layout Subsection
30985 Selected document parts
30988 \begin_layout Standard
30989 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
30990 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
30991 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
30992 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
30994 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
30996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31000 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31001 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31002 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31005 \begin_layout Standard
31006 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31013 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31025 is explained in section
31027 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31032 \begin_inset space ~
31042 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31043 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31044 the final rotated boxes,
31045 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31046 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31048 Here is the result:
31051 \begin_layout Standard
31052 \begin_inset Preview
31054 \begin_layout Standard
31061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31065 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31071 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31081 height_special "totalheight"
31086 backgroundcolor "none"
31089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31116 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31122 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31144 \begin_layout Standard
31145 Previewing works also for colors.
31146 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31165 is explained in section
31172 \begin_inset space ~
31185 \begin_layout Standard
31186 \begin_inset Preview
31188 \begin_layout Standard
31194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31213 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31218 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31237 \begin_layout Standard
31238 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31244 \begin_layout Standard
31245 If \SpecialChar LyX
31246 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31247 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
31248 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
31249 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31250 packages in your document preamble that are required by
31251 the \SpecialChar TeX
31253 If \SpecialChar LyX
31254 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
31255 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
31257 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
31258 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
31259 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
31262 \begin_layout Subsection
31267 \begin_layout Standard
31268 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31269 source of the whole document or parts of it.
31272 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31274 \begin_inset space ~
31279 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31281 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31283 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
31284 's main window, then only this selection
31285 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31286 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31287 the source view window.
31292 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
31293 ; but note that if you have
31294 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
31296 not just the one which is open at the time.
31299 \begin_layout Section
31300 Advanced Find and Replace
31301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31303 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31308 \begin_inset Index idx
31311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31320 \begin_inset Index idx
31323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31334 \begin_layout Subsection
31338 \begin_layout Standard
31339 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
31340 allows for searching of complex,
31341 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
31343 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31344 The key-features are:
31347 \begin_layout Itemize
31348 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31349 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31350 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31354 \begin_layout Itemize
31355 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31356 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31357 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31358 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31361 \begin_layout Itemize
31362 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31363 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31364 outside of mathematics environments
31367 \begin_layout Itemize
31368 Search may be widened to a specific
31373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31377 \begin_inset space ~
31380 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31381 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31388 \begin_layout Itemize
31389 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31390 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31395 \begin_inset space ~
31398 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31401 \begin_layout Subsection
31405 \begin_layout Standard
31406 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31408 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31421 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31424 ) or the toolbar button
31427 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31433 Advanced Find and Replace
31438 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31442 \begin_layout Standard
31448 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31452 \begin_inset space ~
31457 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31460 arg "paragraph-break"
31464 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31465 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31469 arg "paragraph-break"
31472 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31476 searches backwards.
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31483 \begin_inset space ~
31488 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31497 \begin_inset space ~
31502 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31506 Searching for mathematics
31509 \begin_layout Standard
31510 Mathematical formulas, such as
31511 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31514 or something more complex like
31515 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31518 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31523 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31524 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31525 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31526 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31532 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31536 \begin_layout Standard
31537 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31538 This is done by switching to the
31542 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31547 This way, entering in the
31554 \begin_layout Itemize
31555 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31556 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31559 \begin_layout Itemize
31560 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31561 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31564 \begin_layout Itemize
31565 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31566 of it only within section headings.
31567 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31568 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31572 \begin_layout Itemize
31573 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31574 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31581 \begin_layout Standard
31582 The entries made in the
31586 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31589 \begin_inset space ~
31595 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31599 button or alternatively press
31602 arg "paragraph-break"
31609 while the cursor is in the
31612 \begin_inset space ~
31620 \begin_layout Standard
31621 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
31623 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31627 \begin_layout Itemize
31628 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31629 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31637 with its typewriter version
31638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31652 \begin_layout Itemize
31653 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31659 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31671 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31678 (you may want to enable the
31681 \begin_inset space ~
31689 \begin_inset space ~
31694 options and disable the
31702 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31710 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31711 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31715 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
31718 , or occurrences of
31719 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31723 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31729 \begin_layout Subsection
31733 \begin_layout Standard
31734 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31739 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31741 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31743 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31752 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31758 This is done with the context menu
31760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31761 Insert Regular Expression
31763 while the cursor is in the
31768 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31769 expression matching rules
31773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31774 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
31777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31781 \begin_inset space ~
31784 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
31785 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
31791 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31792 same text in the document.
31793 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
31794 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31797 \begin_layout Enumerate
31798 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31803 editor the fraction
31804 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31808 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31811 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31812 fractions with the given denominator.
31815 \begin_layout Enumerate
31816 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31828 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31833 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
31834 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
31835 Also, by inserting a
31836 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31839 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31840 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31843 \begin_layout Standard
31844 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31845 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31846 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31849 , and referring back to them through
31850 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31854 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31858 For example, try searching with the regexp
31859 \begin_inset Newline newline
31862 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31865 \begin_inset Newline newline
31868 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31871 \begin_layout Standard
31872 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31875 \begin_layout Standard
31876 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31884 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31885 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31886 sub-expressions is absolute.
31888 \begin_inset space ~
31892 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31895 always refers to the first occurrence of
31896 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31899 in all entered regexps.
31907 \begin_layout Section
31909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31911 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31916 \begin_inset Index idx
31919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31930 \begin_layout Standard
31932 has a built-in spell checker.
31935 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31942 key or the toolbar button
31945 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31948 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
31949 beginning of the currently selected text.
31950 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31951 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31952 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31953 scrolled so that it is visible.
31954 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31955 n, if any could be found.
31956 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31960 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
31961 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31964 \begin_layout Standard
31965 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31972 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31973 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31975 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31976 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
31979 \begin_inset space ~
31987 arg "dialog-show character"
31990 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31992 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31995 \begin_layout Standard
31996 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31997 can be downloaded from here:
31998 \begin_inset Newline newline
32002 \begin_inset Flex URL
32005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32007 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32013 \begin_inset Newline newline
32017 \begin_inset space ~
32020 files for each language.
32021 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32022 \begin_inset space ~
32025 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32026 's installation subfolder
32034 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32036 \begin_inset Newline newline
32039 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32040 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32041 but in most cases these are
32057 is the language code.
32060 \begin_layout Subsection
32064 \begin_layout Standard
32067 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32068 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32070 \begin_inset space ~
32073 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32076 you can set the following things:
32079 \begin_layout Description
32081 \begin_inset space ~
32084 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32085 should use for spell checking.
32086 Depending on your platform,
32100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32101 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32102 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32117 \begin_inset space ~
32120 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32123 \begin_layout Description
32125 \begin_inset space ~
32128 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32129 will always use the given language
32130 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32133 \begin_layout Description
32135 \begin_inset space ~
32138 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32144 \begin_inset space \space{}
32148 This should normally not be needed.
32151 \begin_layout Description
32153 \begin_inset space ~
32157 \begin_inset space ~
32160 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32172 \begin_layout Description
32174 \begin_inset space ~
32177 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32178 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32179 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32180 appear in a context menu.
32181 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32185 \begin_layout Description
32187 \begin_inset space ~
32191 \begin_inset space ~
32195 \begin_inset space ~
32198 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32202 \begin_layout Section
32204 \begin_inset Index idx
32207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32218 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32225 \begin_layout Standard
32227 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32228 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32238 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32240 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32249 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
32251 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
32252 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32253 which are available for many languages.
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32257 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32258 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
32262 \begin_layout Subsection
32263 Setting up the thesaurus
32266 \begin_layout Standard
32275 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32279 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32284 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32290 \begin_inset space ~
32298 For instance, the US English files are named:
32301 \begin_layout Itemize
32305 \begin_layout Itemize
32309 \begin_layout Standard
32318 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32319 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
32322 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32323 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32324 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32326 \begin_inset space ~
32331 ) to the path where they are installed.
32335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32336 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32337 ies, typical locations are
32343 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32347 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32351 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32354 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32360 LibreOffice-<Version>
32367 On the Mac, the default location is
32369 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
32370 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32371 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
32372 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
32373 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32374 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
32382 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32383 during the \SpecialChar LyX
32384 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
32388 \begin_layout Standard
32389 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
32390 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32394 \begin_layout Itemize
32395 \begin_inset Flex URL
32398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32400 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32408 \begin_layout Standard
32409 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32410 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32413 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32414 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32416 \begin_inset space ~
32421 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32423 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32424 and point \SpecialChar LyX
32428 \begin_layout Standard
32429 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32431 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
32434 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32440 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32443 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
32444 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32453 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32454 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
32456 \begin_inset space ~
32461 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32464 \begin_layout Subsection
32465 Using the thesaurus
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32474 or the toolbar button
32477 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32480 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32482 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32484 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32485 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32486 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32495 ), related terms (such as
32498 \begin_inset space ~
32507 ), compounds (such as
32510 \begin_inset space ~
32519 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32528 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32533 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32537 \begin_layout Standard
32538 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32539 the dictionary, such as the above
32543 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32548 \begin_inset space \space{}
32551 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32552 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32553 For example, looking up the word form
32557 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32562 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32567 \begin_inset space \space{}
32578 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32579 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32580 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32583 \begin_layout Section
32585 \begin_inset Index idx
32588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32597 \begin_inset Index idx
32600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32603 Document ! Change Tracking
32609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32611 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32618 \begin_layout Standard
32619 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32620 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32621 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32622 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32629 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32639 \begin_layout Standard
32640 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32654 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32655 You can change the color in
32657 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32658 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32660 \begin_inset space ~
32664 \begin_inset space ~
32669 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32675 \begin_inset Index idx
32678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32681 Color ! Change tracking
32686 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
32687 's status bar when the
32688 cursor is in changed text.
32689 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32692 arg "changes-merge"
32698 \begin_layout Standard
32699 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
32701 \begin_inset Index idx
32704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32715 \begin_layout Standard
32716 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32722 \begin_layout Standard
32723 \begin_inset Graphics
32724 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32739 \begin_layout Standard
32740 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
32743 \begin_layout Standard
32744 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32750 \begin_layout Standard
32751 \begin_inset Tabular
32752 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32753 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32754 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32755 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
32756 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32765 arg "changes-track"
32773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32781 \begin_inset space ~
32784 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32786 \begin_inset space ~
32795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32804 arg "changes-output"
32812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32820 \begin_inset space ~
32823 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32825 \begin_inset space ~
32829 \begin_inset space ~
32833 \begin_inset space ~
32842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32863 Jumps to the next change
32869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32878 arg "change-accept"
32886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32894 \begin_inset space ~
32897 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32899 \begin_inset space ~
32908 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32917 arg "change-reject"
32925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32933 \begin_inset space ~
32936 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32956 arg "changes-merge"
32964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32972 \begin_inset space ~
32975 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
32977 \begin_inset space ~
32986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32995 arg "all-changes-accept"
33003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33011 \begin_inset space ~
33014 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33016 \begin_inset space ~
33020 \begin_inset space ~
33029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33038 arg "all-changes-reject"
33046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33054 \begin_inset space ~
33057 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33059 \begin_inset space ~
33063 \begin_inset space ~
33072 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33096 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33098 \begin_inset space ~
33107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33130 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33132 \begin_inset space ~
33148 \begin_layout Standard
33149 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33155 \begin_layout Standard
33156 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33176 \begin_layout Standard
33177 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33178 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33179 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33180 the next change after the current cursor position.
33181 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33182 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33183 step to the next change.
33184 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33187 \begin_layout Standard
33188 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33189 to describe a change.
33192 \begin_layout Standard
33193 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33199 \begin_inset Index idx
33202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33206 -packages ! dvipost
33212 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33214 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33220 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33224 \begin_layout Section
33225 Comparison of Documents
33226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33228 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33233 \begin_inset Index idx
33236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33239 Comparison of documents
33247 \begin_layout Standard
33248 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
33251 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33255 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
33256 file with change tracking enabled showing the
33258 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
33260 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33264 \begin_inset space ~
33268 \begin_inset space ~
33272 \begin_inset space ~
33281 \begin_inset space ~
33285 \begin_inset space ~
33289 \begin_inset space ~
33293 \begin_inset space ~
33297 \begin_inset space ~
33301 \begin_inset space ~
33306 enables the change tracking option
33309 \begin_inset space ~
33313 \begin_inset space ~
33317 \begin_inset space ~
33322 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33325 \begin_layout Section
33326 International Support
33327 \begin_inset Index idx
33330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33333 International support
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
33343 with any language you want.
33344 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33345 up \SpecialChar LyX
33347 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33349 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33356 \begin_layout Standard
33357 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
33358 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33365 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
33372 \begin_layout Subsection
33374 \begin_inset Index idx
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33386 \begin_inset Index idx
33389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33392 Document ! Settings
33398 \begin_inset Index idx
33401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33404 Document ! Language
33412 \begin_layout Standard
33415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33416 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33419 dialog lets you set the language, the quote style and character encoding.
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33427 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
33432 \begin_inset space ~
33437 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33438 For details about the different encoding options see section
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33445 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33452 \begin_layout Subsection
33453 Keyboard mapping configuration
33454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33456 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
33463 \begin_layout Standard
33464 If you have for example a U.
33465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33468 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33469 can use an alternate keymap.
33470 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
33475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33476 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33477 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
33480 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33481 \begin_inset space ~
33485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33487 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
33492 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33493 which one you want to use.
33496 \begin_layout Standard
33497 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33498 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33499 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33503 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33504 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33505 one to support the characters you want.
33506 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33513 \begin_layout Chapter
33516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33518 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33525 \begin_layout Standard
33526 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33527 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33528 topic inside the user's guide.
33531 \begin_layout Section
33533 \begin_inset Index idx
33536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33547 \begin_layout Standard
33552 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33555 \begin_layout Subsection
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33560 Creates a new document.
33563 \begin_layout Subsection
33567 \begin_layout Standard
33568 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33569 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33570 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33573 \begin_layout Subsection
33577 \begin_layout Standard
33581 \begin_layout Subsection
33585 \begin_layout Standard
33586 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33587 Click there on a file to open it.
33590 \begin_layout Subsection
33594 \begin_layout Standard
33595 Closes the current document.
33598 \begin_layout Subsection
33602 \begin_layout Standard
33603 Closes all opened documents.
33606 \begin_layout Subsection
33610 \begin_layout Standard
33611 Saves the actual document.
33614 \begin_layout Subsection
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33619 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33622 \begin_layout Subsection
33626 \begin_layout Standard
33627 Saves all opened documents.
33630 \begin_layout Subsection
33634 \begin_layout Standard
33635 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33638 \begin_layout Subsection
33642 \begin_layout Standard
33643 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33644 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33645 It is described in the section
33647 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
33652 Additional Features
33657 \begin_layout Subsection
33661 \begin_layout Standard
33662 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
33663 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
33665 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
33666 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
33670 \begin_layout Standard
33671 When using the menu entry
33674 \begin_inset space ~
33679 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33683 \begin_inset space ~
33687 \begin_inset space ~
33691 \begin_inset space ~
33696 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33697 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33700 \begin_layout Subsection
33702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33704 name "subsec:Export"
33711 \begin_layout Standard
33712 You can export your document to various file formats.
33713 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
33715 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33716 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
33717 during its configuration.
33720 \begin_layout Standard
33721 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33723 \begin_inset space ~
33727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33729 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
33736 \begin_layout Description
33738 \begin_inset space ~
33741 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
33743 \begin_inset space ~
33746 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33747 \begin_inset Newline newline
33750 Since \SpecialChar LyX
33751 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
33755 \begin_layout Description
33756 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33762 \begin_layout Description
33764 \begin_inset space ~
33767 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33773 \begin_layout Description
33774 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
33775 's native DVI-format.
33776 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33777 files paths or file names in your document.
33779 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33786 \begin_layout Description
33787 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33788 in files paths or file names
33791 \begin_layout Description
33793 \begin_inset space ~
33796 (LuaTeX) DVI-format using the program
33798 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33801 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
33805 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33813 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33821 \begin_layout Description
33823 \begin_inset space ~
33826 (cropped) the same as
33830 but with cropped page margins.
33833 \begin_layout Description
33835 \begin_inset space ~
33838 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33842 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33847 \begin_layout Description
33851 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33859 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
33867 \begin_layout Description
33869 \begin_inset space ~
33873 \begin_inset space ~
33876 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33880 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33888 \begin_layout Description
33890 \begin_inset space ~
33893 (LuaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33894 source that is compilable with the program
33897 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
33901 \begin_layout Description
33903 \begin_inset space ~
33906 (pdflatex) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33907 source, additionally all images used in the
33908 document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33912 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33915 \begin_layout Description
33917 \begin_inset space ~
33920 (plain) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33921 source code, additionally all images used in
33922 the document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33930 \begin_layout Description
33932 \begin_inset space ~
33935 (XeTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33936 source that is compilable with the program
33942 \begin_layout Description
33944 \begin_inset space ~
33948 \begin_inset space ~
33951 (LaTeX) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33952 source and also code in the syntax of the music
33958 \begin_layout Description
33960 \begin_inset space ~
33963 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
33964 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
33966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33970 \begin_inset space \space{}
33975 \begin_inset space ~
33979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33994 represent the version number)
33997 \begin_layout Description
33999 \begin_inset space ~
34003 \begin_inset space ~
34006 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34007 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34008 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34012 \begin_layout Description
34013 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34014 's internal XHTML engine
34017 \begin_layout Description
34018 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34023 \begin_layout Description
34024 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34026 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34029 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34033 \begin_layout Description
34035 \begin_inset space ~
34038 (cropped) the same as
34041 \begin_inset space ~
34046 but with cropped page margins
34049 \begin_layout Description
34051 \begin_inset space ~
34054 (dvipdfm) PDF-format using the program
34058 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34061 \begin_layout Description
34063 \begin_inset space ~
34067 \begin_inset space ~
34070 resolution) the same as
34073 \begin_inset space ~
34078 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34083 \begin_inset space \space{}
34086 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34090 \begin_layout Description
34092 \begin_inset space ~
34095 (LuaTeX) PDF-format using the program
34097 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34100 , produces PDF-files directly
34103 \begin_layout Description
34105 \begin_inset space ~
34108 (pdflatex) PDF-format using the program
34112 , produces PDF-files directly
34115 \begin_layout Description
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34120 (ps2pdf) PDF-format using the program
34124 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34127 \begin_layout Description
34129 \begin_inset space ~
34132 (XeTeX) PDF-format using the program
34137 , produces PDF-files directly
34140 \begin_layout Description
34142 \begin_inset space ~
34148 \begin_layout Description
34150 \begin_inset space ~
34154 \begin_inset space ~
34157 (ps2ascii) text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript
34158 format and then exported as text using the program
34163 \begin_layout Description
34164 Postscript PostScript format using the program
34169 \begin_layout Description
34170 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34171 source and also code in the statistical programming
34185 it is possible to use
34189 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34193 \begin_layout Standard
34194 If one of the menu entries
34201 \begin_inset space ~
34210 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34212 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
34214 \begin_inset space ~
34218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34220 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34225 \begin_inset Index idx
34228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34231 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
34240 \begin_layout Subsection
34244 \begin_layout Standard
34245 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34246 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
34249 \begin_inset space ~
34253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34255 reference "sec:Paths"
34260 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34269 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34270 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
34271 's preferences as described in section
34272 \begin_inset space ~
34276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34278 reference "subsec:Converters"
34285 \begin_layout Subsection
34286 New and Close Window
34289 \begin_layout Standard
34290 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
34294 \begin_layout Subsection
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34299 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34302 \begin_layout Section
34304 \begin_inset Index idx
34307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34318 \begin_layout Subsection
34322 \begin_layout Standard
34323 Described in section
34324 \begin_inset space ~
34328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34330 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34337 \begin_layout Subsection
34338 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34341 \begin_layout Standard
34342 Described in section
34343 \begin_inset space ~
34347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34349 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34356 \begin_layout Subsection
34360 \begin_layout Standard
34361 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34362 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34365 \begin_layout Subsection
34369 \begin_layout Standard
34370 Selects the whole document.
34373 \begin_layout Subsection
34374 Find & Replace (Quick)
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34378 Described in section
34379 \begin_inset space ~
34383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34385 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34392 \begin_layout Subsection
34393 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 Described in section
34398 \begin_inset space ~
34402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34404 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34411 \begin_layout Subsection
34412 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34415 \begin_layout Standard
34416 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34420 \begin_layout Subsection
34424 \begin_layout Standard
34425 Described in section
34426 \begin_inset space ~
34430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34432 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34439 \begin_layout Subsection
34441 \begin_inset Index idx
34444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 Paragraph ! Settings
34455 \begin_layout Standard
34456 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34457 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34461 \begin_layout Standard
34462 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34463 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34470 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34472 \begin_inset space ~
34480 \begin_layout Subsection
34484 \begin_layout Standard
34485 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34486 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34487 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34491 \begin_layout Standard
34492 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34494 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34495 The properties of tables are described in section
34496 \begin_inset space ~
34500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34502 reference "sec:Tables"
34506 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34507 \begin_inset space ~
34511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34513 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34520 \begin_layout Subsection
34521 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34524 \begin_layout Standard
34525 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
34527 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34528 \begin_inset space ~
34532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34534 reference "sec:Nesting"
34539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34541 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34548 \begin_layout Subsection
34549 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
34552 \begin_layout Standard
34553 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
34554 nts of the same type.
34556 \begin_inset space ~
34560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34562 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
34566 for an explanation.
34569 \begin_layout Section
34571 \begin_inset Index idx
34574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34585 \begin_layout Standard
34586 At the bottom of the
34590 menu the opened documents are listed.
34593 \begin_layout Subsection
34594 Open/Close all Insets
34597 \begin_layout Standard
34598 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34601 \begin_layout Subsection
34602 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34605 \begin_layout Standard
34606 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34609 \begin_layout Standard
34610 Math macros are described in the
34617 \begin_layout Subsection
34621 \begin_layout Standard
34622 Shows the outline window as described in sections
34623 \begin_inset space ~
34627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34629 reference "sec:Navigating"
34634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34636 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34643 \begin_layout Subsection
34647 \begin_layout Standard
34648 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34650 \begin_inset space ~
34654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34656 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34663 \begin_layout Subsection
34667 \begin_layout Standard
34668 Opens a window showing console messages.
34669 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
34671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34674 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34675 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
34676 is processing the document.
34679 \begin_layout Subsection
34681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34683 name "subsec:Toolbars"
34688 \begin_inset Index idx
34691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34702 \begin_layout Standard
34703 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34704 All toolbars and the
34707 \begin_inset space ~
34712 can be turned on and off.
34717 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34729 \begin_inset space ~
34741 \begin_inset space ~
34746 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
34750 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
34757 \begin_layout Standard
34762 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
34766 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34767 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34768 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34769 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34770 is inside a formula or table respectively.
34773 \begin_layout Standard
34775 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34776 \begin_inset space ~
34780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34782 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34789 \begin_layout Subsection
34793 \begin_layout Standard
34797 \begin_inset space ~
34801 \begin_inset space ~
34805 \begin_inset space ~
34809 \begin_inset space ~
34813 \begin_inset space ~
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34822 will split \SpecialChar LyX
34823 's main window vertically while
34826 \begin_inset space ~
34830 \begin_inset space ~
34834 \begin_inset space ~
34838 \begin_inset space ~
34842 \begin_inset space ~
34846 \begin_inset space ~
34851 will split it horizontally.
34852 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34853 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34854 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
34855 three or more documents at the same time.
34856 To close a split view, use the menu
34859 \begin_inset space ~
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34871 \begin_layout Subsection
34875 \begin_layout Standard
34876 Closes a split view.
34879 \begin_layout Subsection
34883 \begin_layout Standard
34884 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34885 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34886 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
34887 's main window fullscreen.
34888 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34889 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34892 \begin_layout Section
34894 \begin_inset Index idx
34897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34908 \begin_layout Subsection
34912 \begin_layout Standard
34913 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34914 \begin_inset space ~
34918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34920 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34931 \begin_layout Subsection
34933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34935 name "subsec:Special-Character"
34942 \begin_layout Standard
34943 Here you can insert the following characters:
34946 \begin_layout Description
34951 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
34954 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
34955 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34956 -packages you have installed.
34957 You can get a complete display by checking
34960 \begin_inset space ~
34966 \begin_inset Newline newline
34970 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34978 Not all characters will be visible in the
34982 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
34984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34990 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
34994 ) can display every character.
35002 \begin_layout Description
35003 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35007 \begin_layout Description
35009 \begin_inset space ~
35013 \begin_inset space ~
35016 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35017 \begin_inset space ~
35021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35023 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35030 \begin_layout Description
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35035 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35039 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35045 \begin_layout Description
35047 \begin_inset space ~
35050 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35054 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35060 \begin_layout Description
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35065 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35069 \begin_layout Description
35071 \begin_inset space ~
35074 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35078 \begin_layout Description
35080 \begin_inset space ~
35083 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35089 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35095 \begin_layout Description
35097 \begin_inset space ~
35100 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35104 \begin_layout Description
35106 \begin_inset space ~
35110 \begin_inset Index idx
35113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35122 \begin_inset Index idx
35125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35128 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35133 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35134 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35136 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35142 \begin_inset Index idx
35145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35155 \begin_inset Newline newline
35158 More information about this feature can be found in the
35164 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
35170 \begin_layout Subsection
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35178 \begin_layout Description
35179 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35180 \begin_inset script superscript
35182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35193 \begin_layout Description
35194 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35195 \begin_inset script subscript
35197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35208 \begin_layout Description
35210 \begin_inset space ~
35213 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35220 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
35227 \begin_layout Description
35229 \begin_inset space ~
35232 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35233 \begin_inset space ~
35237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35239 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
35246 \begin_layout Description
35248 \begin_inset space ~
35251 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35252 \begin_inset space ~
35256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35258 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
35265 \begin_layout Description
35267 \begin_inset space ~
35270 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35276 \begin_inset space \space{}
35279 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35280 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
35286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35289 To insert a fraction use the command
35294 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35298 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35307 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35314 \begin_layout Description
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35319 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35320 \begin_inset space ~
35324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35326 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
35333 \begin_layout Description
35335 \begin_inset space ~
35338 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35339 \begin_inset space ~
35343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35345 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
35352 \begin_layout Description
35354 \begin_inset space ~
35357 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35364 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
35371 \begin_layout Description
35372 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35373 \begin_inset space ~
35377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35379 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
35386 \begin_layout Description
35388 \begin_inset space ~
35391 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35392 \begin_inset space ~
35396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35398 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
35405 \begin_layout Description
35407 \begin_inset space ~
35410 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35417 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
35424 \begin_layout Description
35426 \begin_inset space ~
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35433 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35434 \begin_inset space ~
35438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35440 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35447 \begin_layout Description
35449 \begin_inset space ~
35452 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35453 as described in section
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35460 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35467 \begin_layout Description
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35472 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35473 \begin_inset space ~
35477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35479 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35486 \begin_layout Description
35488 \begin_inset space ~
35491 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35492 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35494 \begin_inset space ~
35498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35500 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35507 \begin_layout Description
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35512 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35513 \begin_inset space ~
35517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35519 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35526 \begin_layout Description
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35532 \begin_inset space ~
35535 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35536 \begin_inset space ~
35540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35542 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35549 \begin_layout Subsection
35553 \begin_layout Standard
35554 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35558 \begin_inset space ~
35579 are described in section
35580 \begin_inset space ~
35584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35586 reference "sec:toc"
35595 is described in section
35596 \begin_inset space ~
35600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35602 reference "sec:Index"
35610 is described in section
35611 \begin_inset space ~
35615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35617 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35623 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35626 is described in section
35627 \begin_inset space ~
35631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35633 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35640 \begin_layout Subsection
35644 \begin_layout Standard
35645 To insert floats, as described in section
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35652 reference "sec:Floats"
35656 and in detail the chapter
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35671 \begin_layout Subsection
35675 \begin_layout Standard
35676 To insert notes, described in section
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35683 reference "sec:Notes"
35690 \begin_layout Subsection
35694 \begin_layout Standard
35695 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
35697 Branches are described in section
35698 \begin_inset space ~
35702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35704 reference "sec:Branches"
35711 \begin_layout Subsection
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35716 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35717 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35719 An example is the document class
35720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35727 with three custom insets.
35730 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35734 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
35740 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35743 \begin_layout Subsection
35745 \begin_inset Index idx
35748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35759 \begin_layout Standard
35760 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35762 For more information see chapter
35764 External Document Parts
35767 \begin_inset space ~
35773 \begin_layout Subsection
35775 \begin_inset Index idx
35778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35789 \begin_layout Standard
35790 Inserts a box in a certain style.
35791 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
35798 \begin_inset space ~
35806 \begin_layout Subsection
35810 \begin_layout Standard
35815 dialog as described in section
35816 \begin_inset space ~
35820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35822 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35829 \begin_layout Subsection
35833 \begin_layout Standard
35838 as described in section
35839 \begin_inset space ~
35843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35845 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35852 \begin_layout Subsection
35856 \begin_layout Standard
35861 as described in section
35862 \begin_inset space ~
35866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35868 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35875 \begin_layout Subsection
35877 \begin_inset Index idx
35880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35889 \begin_inset Index idx
35892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35895 Longtables ! Caption
35903 \begin_layout Standard
35904 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35905 Floats are described in section
35906 \begin_inset space ~
35910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35912 reference "sec:Floats"
35916 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
35923 \begin_inset space ~
35931 \begin_layout Subsection
35935 \begin_layout Standard
35936 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35943 reference "sec:Index"
35950 \begin_layout Subsection
35954 \begin_layout Standard
35955 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35962 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35969 \begin_layout Subsection
35973 \begin_layout Standard
35974 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
35975 Tables are described in section
35976 \begin_inset space ~
35980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35982 reference "sec:Tables"
35986 and in detail in the chapter
35993 \begin_inset space ~
36001 \begin_layout Subsection
36005 \begin_layout Standard
36011 Graphics are described in section
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36018 reference "sec:Graphics"
36025 \begin_layout Subsection
36029 \begin_layout Standard
36030 Inserts a URL as described in section
36031 \begin_inset space ~
36035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36037 reference "subsec:URLs"
36044 \begin_layout Subsection
36048 \begin_layout Standard
36049 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36050 \begin_inset space ~
36054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36056 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36063 \begin_layout Subsection
36067 \begin_layout Standard
36068 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36069 \begin_inset space ~
36073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36075 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36082 \begin_layout Subsection
36086 \begin_layout Standard
36087 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36094 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36101 \begin_layout Subsection
36105 \begin_layout Standard
36106 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36107 title or caption of a float.
36108 Inserts a short title as described in section
36109 \begin_inset space ~
36113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36115 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36122 \begin_layout Subsection
36127 \begin_layout Standard
36128 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36129 Code box as described in section
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36136 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36143 \begin_layout Subsection
36145 \begin_inset Index idx
36148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36159 \begin_layout Standard
36160 Inserts a program listings box.
36161 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36163 Program Code Listings
36168 \begin_inset space ~
36176 \begin_layout Subsection
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 Inserts the actual date.
36182 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36186 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36202 \begin_layout Subsection
36206 \begin_layout Standard
36207 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36208 \begin_inset space ~
36212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36214 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36221 \begin_layout Section
36223 \begin_inset Index idx
36226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36237 \begin_layout Standard
36238 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36239 \begin_inset space ~
36242 of the current document.
36243 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36246 \begin_layout Subsection
36250 \begin_layout Standard
36251 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36252 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36253 to jump, for example, between section
36254 \begin_inset space ~
36258 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36259 \begin_inset space ~
36262 2.5 and use the submenu
36265 \begin_inset space ~
36269 \begin_inset space ~
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36282 \begin_inset space ~
36286 \begin_inset space ~
36292 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36296 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36302 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36305 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36308 \begin_layout Standard
36309 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36313 \begin_inset space ~
36318 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36321 \begin_inset space ~
36326 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36329 \begin_layout Subsection
36330 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36333 \begin_layout Standard
36334 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36338 \begin_layout Subsection
36342 \begin_layout Standard
36343 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36344 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36345 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36361 \begin_layout Subsection
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36366 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36369 The \SpecialChar LyX
36370 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
36372 \begin_inset space ~
36380 \begin_inset space ~
36385 manual for a detailed description.
36388 \begin_layout Section
36390 \begin_inset Index idx
36393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36404 \begin_layout Subsection
36408 \begin_layout Standard
36409 Change Tracking is described in section
36410 \begin_inset space ~
36414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36416 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36423 \begin_layout Subsection
36427 \begin_layout Standard
36428 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
36429 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
36430 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36432 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36433 to the clipboard or update the view.
36434 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36438 \begin_layout Subsection
36439 Start Appendix Here
36442 \begin_layout Standard
36443 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36444 as described in section
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36451 reference "sec:Appendices"
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36460 \begin_inset space ~
36466 \begin_layout Standard
36467 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36468 default output format for the document (menu
36470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36471 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36472 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36474 \begin_inset space ~
36478 \begin_inset space ~
36484 \begin_inset space ~
36488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36490 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36494 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
36497 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36498 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36503 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36505 \begin_inset space ~
36508 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36520 \begin_inset space ~
36524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36526 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36530 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36531 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36533 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36534 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36536 \begin_inset space ~
36539 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36541 \begin_inset space ~
36544 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36548 \begin_inset space ~
36552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36554 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36559 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36560 when it is first configured.
36561 The default output format is
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36572 \begin_layout Subsection
36573 View (Other Formats)
36576 \begin_layout Standard
36577 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36578 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36579 actual document with an external program.
36580 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36581 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36582 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
36584 All possible formats are listed in section
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36591 reference "subsec:Export"
36596 You should at least see the menu entry
36601 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36603 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
36605 \begin_inset space ~
36609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36611 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36616 \begin_inset Index idx
36619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36622 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
36631 \begin_layout Standard
36632 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36633 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36635 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36636 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36638 \begin_inset space ~
36641 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36643 \begin_inset space ~
36646 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36650 \begin_inset space ~
36654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36656 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36661 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
36662 when it is first configured.
36665 \begin_layout Subsection
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_layout Standard
36674 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
36675 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
36678 \begin_layout Subsection
36679 Update (Other Formats)
36682 \begin_layout Standard
36683 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
36684 your document without opening a new viewer window.
36687 \begin_layout Subsection
36688 View Master Document
36691 \begin_layout Standard
36692 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36713 manual for more information on this topic).
36714 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
36715 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
36719 \begin_inset space ~
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36728 generates the output of the whole book, while
36732 will just output the chapter alone.
36735 \begin_layout Standard
36736 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36737 in the document settings (menu
36739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36740 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36741 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36753 \begin_inset space ~
36757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36759 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36763 ) or in the preferences (menu
36765 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36766 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36768 \begin_inset space ~
36771 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36773 \begin_inset space ~
36776 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36778 \begin_inset space ~
36782 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36794 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36801 \begin_layout Subsection
36802 Update Master Document
36805 \begin_layout Standard
36806 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
36808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36822 \begin_inset space ~
36827 manual for more information on this topic).
36828 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
36829 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
36832 \begin_layout Standard
36833 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
36834 in the document settings (menu
36836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36837 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36838 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36844 \begin_inset space ~
36850 \begin_inset space ~
36854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36856 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36860 ) or in the preferences (menu
36862 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36863 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36868 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
36870 \begin_inset space ~
36873 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36879 \begin_inset space ~
36885 \begin_inset space ~
36889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36891 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36898 \begin_layout Subsection
36900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36902 name "subsec:Compressed"
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36910 Un/compresses the current document.
36911 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
36912 compression (see the
36914 Additional Features
36916 manual for details).
36919 \begin_layout Subsection
36923 \begin_layout Standard
36924 The document settings are described in appendix
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36931 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36938 \begin_layout Section
36940 \begin_inset Index idx
36943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36954 \begin_layout Subsection
36958 \begin_layout Standard
36959 Spell checking is explained in section
36960 \begin_inset space ~
36964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36966 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
36973 \begin_layout Subsection
36977 \begin_layout Standard
36978 The thesaurus is described in section
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36985 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
36992 \begin_layout Subsection
36994 \begin_inset Index idx
36997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37006 \begin_inset Index idx
37009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37020 \begin_layout Standard
37021 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37022 the highlighted document part.
37025 \begin_layout Subsection
37027 \begin_inset Index idx
37030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37033 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37042 \begin_layout Standard
37043 Generates with the help of the program
37045 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37048 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37049 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37050 This feature is not available on Windows.
37053 \begin_layout Subsection
37055 \begin_inset Index idx
37058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37070 \begin_layout Standard
37071 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37076 \begin_inset space ~
37081 to see the full filename paths.
37084 \begin_layout Subsection
37086 \begin_inset Index idx
37089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37100 \begin_layout Standard
37101 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37102 files as described in section
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37109 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37116 \begin_layout Subsection
37118 \begin_inset Index idx
37121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37136 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37154 \begin_inset Index idx
37157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37160 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37169 \begin_layout Standard
37170 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
37171 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
37172 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37173 -packages and programs it needs; see
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37181 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37188 \begin_layout Subsection
37192 \begin_layout Standard
37197 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37204 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37211 \begin_layout Section
37213 \begin_inset Index idx
37216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37227 \begin_layout Standard
37228 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
37229 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
37231 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37235 \begin_layout Standard
37240 \begin_inset space ~
37245 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
37246 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37247 packages and classes found
37248 by \SpecialChar LyX
37250 \begin_inset space ~
37254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37256 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37263 \begin_layout Standard
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37272 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
37277 \begin_layout Section
37279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37281 name "sec:Toolbars"
37288 \begin_layout Standard
37289 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37296 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
37303 \begin_layout Standard
37304 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37305 This is described in the
37307 Additional Features
37312 \begin_layout Subsection
37314 \begin_inset Index idx
37317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37328 \begin_layout Standard
37329 \begin_inset Graphics
37330 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37338 \begin_layout Standard
37339 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37345 \begin_layout Standard
37346 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37363 \begin_inset Note Note
37366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37369 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37374 manual for more information.
37382 \begin_layout Standard
37383 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37389 \begin_layout Standard
37390 \begin_inset Tabular
37391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37392 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37400 \begin_inset Graphics
37401 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37415 pull-down box for the environments
37428 \begin_layout Standard
37429 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37435 \begin_layout Standard
37437 \begin_inset Tabular
37438 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37439 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37440 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37441 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37465 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37525 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37541 arg "dialog-show print"
37549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37555 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
37562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37571 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37585 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37645 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37675 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37751 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37765 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37791 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37805 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37824 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37833 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37847 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37848 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
37855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37876 Emphasize text, function of the
37878 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37880 \begin_inset space ~
37883 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37913 Set text to noun style, function of the
37915 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37917 \begin_inset space ~
37920 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37938 arg "textstyle-apply"
37946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37950 Format text using the current settings in the
37952 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37957 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
37966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37990 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
37992 \begin_inset space ~
38001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38010 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38038 arg "tabular-insert"
38046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38068 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38080 Toggle outline window on/off,
38082 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38098 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38110 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38116 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38125 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38137 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38150 \begin_layout Subsection
38152 \begin_inset Index idx
38155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38166 \begin_layout Standard
38167 \begin_inset Graphics
38168 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38176 \begin_layout Standard
38177 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38183 \begin_layout Standard
38184 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38189 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38195 \begin_layout Standard
38196 \begin_inset Tabular
38197 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38198 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38200 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38237 arg "layout Enumerate"
38245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38264 arg "layout Itemize"
38272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38318 arg "layout Description"
38326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38336 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38345 arg "depth-increment"
38353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38365 \begin_inset space ~
38374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38383 arg "depth-decrement"
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38399 \begin_inset space ~
38403 \begin_inset space ~
38412 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 arg "float-insert figure"
38429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38436 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38452 arg "float-insert table"
38460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38466 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38467 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
38474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38497 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38504 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38513 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38534 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38543 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38564 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38589 \begin_inset space ~
38598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38607 arg "nomencl-insert"
38615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38621 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38623 \begin_inset space ~
38632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38641 arg "footnote-insert"
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38671 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38687 \begin_inset space ~
38696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38720 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38731 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38740 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38791 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38834 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38849 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38865 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38880 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38882 \begin_inset space ~
38891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38900 arg "dialog-show character"
38908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38916 \begin_inset space ~
38919 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38926 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 arg "layout-paragraph"
38943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38949 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38983 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38997 \begin_layout Subsection
38998 View/Update Toolbar
38999 \begin_inset Index idx
39002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39005 Toolbar ! View / Update
39013 \begin_layout Standard
39014 \begin_inset Graphics
39015 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39022 \begin_layout Standard
39023 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39029 \begin_layout Standard
39030 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39034 \begin_layout Standard
39035 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39041 \begin_layout Standard
39042 \begin_inset Tabular
39043 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39044 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39045 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39046 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39086 arg "buffer-update"
39094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39116 arg "master-buffer-view"
39124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39132 \begin_inset space ~
39141 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39150 arg "master-buffer-update"
39158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39166 \begin_inset space ~
39170 \begin_inset space ~
39179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39188 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39202 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39203 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39204 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39205 Synchronize with Output
39211 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39216 \begin_inset Graphics
39217 filename ../../images/view-others.svgz
39219 groupId toolbarbuttons
39230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39237 View (Other Formats)
39243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39248 \begin_inset Graphics
39249 filename ../../images/update-others.svgz
39251 groupId toolbarbuttons
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39267 Update (Other Formats)
39280 \begin_layout Standard
39281 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39285 \begin_layout Subsection
39289 \begin_layout Standard
39290 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39291 \begin_inset space ~
39295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39297 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39301 , the table toolbar
39302 \begin_inset Index idx
39305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39321 manual and the math macro toolbar
39322 \begin_inset Index idx
39325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39340 \begin_layout Chapter
39341 The Document Settings
39342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39344 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39349 \begin_inset Index idx
39352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39355 Document ! Settings
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39367 \begin_inset space ~
39372 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39373 is called with the menu
39375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39379 You can save your document settings as default with the
39381 Save as Document Defaults
39383 button in any dialog.
39384 This will create a template named
39388 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
39389 when you create a new document without
39393 \begin_layout Standard
39398 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39399 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39402 \begin_layout Standard
39403 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39404 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39405 to find the one you are looking for.
39406 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39407 the submenus of the dialog.
39409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39413 \begin_inset space \space{}
39417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39424 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39425 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39426 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39429 \begin_layout Section
39433 \begin_layout Standard
39434 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39436 Document classes are described in section
39437 \begin_inset space ~
39441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39443 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39451 \begin_layout Standard
39455 \begin_inset space ~
39460 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
39465 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
39466 as a layout for a document class.
39467 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39469 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Some classes use special class options by default.
39480 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39484 and you can decide to use them or not.
39485 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39486 recommended you leave them untouched.
39491 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39492 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39497 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39499 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39505 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39506 \begin_inset Newline newline
39511 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39514 \begin_inset Newline newline
39517 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39518 distribution, see section
39523 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39525 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39537 \begin_layout Standard
39542 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39543 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
39544 in the background if the child document
39545 is opened without its master.
39546 This way child documents are always compilable.
39547 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39554 \begin_inset space ~
39562 \begin_layout Standard
39563 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39574 \begin_inset Index idx
39577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 -packages ! prettyref
39587 \begin_inset Index idx
39590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 -packages ! refstyle
39599 for cross-references, see section
39600 \begin_inset space ~
39604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39606 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39613 \begin_layout Section
39617 \begin_layout Standard
39618 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39619 Please refer to the section
39622 \begin_inset space ~
39630 \begin_inset space ~
39635 manual for details.
39638 \begin_layout Section
39642 \begin_layout Standard
39643 Modules are explained in section
39644 \begin_inset space ~
39648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39650 reference "subsec:Modules"
39657 \begin_layout Section
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39669 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
39676 \begin_layout Section
39680 \begin_layout Standard
39681 The document font settings are described in section
39682 \begin_inset space ~
39686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39688 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39695 \begin_layout Section
39699 \begin_layout Standard
39700 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
39712 \begin_inset space ~
39717 and whether it should be a
39720 \begin_inset space ~
39725 can also be specified here.
39728 \begin_layout Standard
39729 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
39730 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
39731 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39733 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
39736 \begin_layout Standard
39739 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
39742 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
39743 justifies the text on screen.
39744 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
39748 \begin_layout Section
39752 \begin_layout Standard
39753 This dialog is described in sections
39754 \begin_inset space ~
39758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39760 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39767 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
39774 \begin_layout Section
39778 \begin_layout Standard
39779 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
39780 \begin_inset space ~
39784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39786 reference "subsec:Margins"
39793 \begin_layout Section
39795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39797 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39802 \begin_inset Index idx
39805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39808 Language ! Encoding
39816 \begin_layout Standard
39817 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39818 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
39819 (the \SpecialChar LyX
39821 is always encoded in utf8).
39822 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39823 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
39824 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39825 -command is not known for
39826 a particular character).
39829 \begin_layout Standard
39830 If you use the option
39835 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39836 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39837 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39839 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39840 exactly one encoding.
39841 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39844 \begin_layout Standard
39846 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39847 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39848 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39849 installation supports Unicode), choose
39850 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39851 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39852 is quite incomplete, so
39853 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39858 (when \SpecialChar LyX
39859 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39860 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
39861 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
39862 -commands is not used, because all
39863 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39864 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
39865 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39866 , two new alternative engines
39867 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
39869 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39871 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39874 \begin_inset space ~
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39896 \begin_inset space ~
39900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39902 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39907 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39911 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39918 \begin_inset space ~
39923 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39924 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39934 The possible settings are:
39937 \begin_layout Description
39938 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39940 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39941 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39945 \begin_inset space ~
39949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39951 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
39958 \begin_layout Description
39959 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
39960 format you will use.
39961 In many cases this will be
39966 \begin_inset Index idx
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39979 If the newer package
39984 \begin_inset Index idx
39987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39991 -packages ! polyglossia
39996 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
39997 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39998 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40000 this package will be used instead of
40007 \begin_layout Description
40009 \begin_inset space ~
40020 would be more appropriate.
40023 \begin_layout Description
40024 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40025 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40029 (for German texts), type in
40032 \begin_inset Newline newline
40037 usepackage{ngerman}
40040 \begin_layout Description
40041 None will not use a language package.
40042 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40045 \begin_layout Standard
40046 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40049 \begin_layout Description
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40059 \begin_inset space ~
40066 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40072 \begin_inset Index idx
40075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40079 -packages ! inputenc
40085 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40086 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40087 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40091 \begin_layout Description
40092 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40094 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40095 commands, which may result in a big
40096 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40097 -commands are needed.
40100 \begin_layout Description
40102 \begin_inset space ~
40106 \begin_inset space ~
40109 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40112 \begin_layout Description
40114 \begin_inset space ~
40118 \begin_inset space ~
40121 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40124 \begin_layout Description
40126 \begin_inset space ~
40129 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40132 \begin_layout Description
40134 \begin_inset space ~
40138 \begin_inset space ~
40141 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40142 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40145 \begin_layout Description
40147 \begin_inset space ~
40151 \begin_inset space ~
40154 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40158 \begin_layout Description
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40167 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40168 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40171 \begin_layout Description
40173 \begin_inset space ~
40177 \begin_inset space ~
40181 \begin_inset space ~
40184 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40185 \begin_inset space ~
40191 \begin_layout Description
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40197 \begin_inset space ~
40201 \begin_inset space ~
40204 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40205 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40208 \begin_layout Description
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40214 \begin_inset space ~
40217 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40218 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40219 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40220 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_inset space ~
40231 \begin_layout Description
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40240 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40241 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40242 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40244 should try to use the encoding Unicode
40245 \begin_inset space ~
40249 \begin_inset space ~
40255 \begin_layout Description
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_inset space ~
40264 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40267 \begin_layout Description
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40276 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40279 \begin_layout Description
40281 \begin_inset space ~
40285 \begin_inset space ~
40288 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40291 \begin_layout Description
40293 \begin_inset space ~
40296 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40299 \begin_layout Description
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40304 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40307 \begin_layout Description
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40316 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40319 \begin_layout Description
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40325 \begin_inset space ~
40331 \begin_layout Description
40333 \begin_inset space ~
40337 \begin_inset space ~
40340 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40343 \begin_layout Description
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_layout Description
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40361 \begin_inset space ~
40364 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40370 \begin_inset Index idx
40373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40382 , when using this, set the document language to
40387 \begin_layout Description
40389 \begin_inset space ~
40393 \begin_inset space ~
40396 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40401 , when using this, set the document language to
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40410 \begin_layout Description
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40419 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40425 \begin_inset Index idx
40428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40432 -packages ! japanese
40437 , when using this, set the document language to
40442 \begin_layout Description
40444 \begin_inset space ~
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40451 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40456 , when using this, set the document language to
40461 \begin_layout Description
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40470 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40475 , when using this, set the document language to
40480 \begin_layout Description
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40485 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40488 \begin_layout Description
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset space ~
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40501 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40504 \begin_layout Description
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40517 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40518 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40519 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40522 \begin_layout Description
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40534 \begin_layout Description
40536 \begin_inset space ~
40540 \begin_inset space ~
40543 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40544 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40547 \begin_layout Description
40549 \begin_inset space ~
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40556 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40562 \begin_inset Index idx
40565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40574 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40577 \begin_layout Description
40579 \begin_inset space ~
40583 \begin_inset space ~
40586 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40593 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40596 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40603 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40604 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40606 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40609 \begin_layout Description
40611 \begin_inset space ~
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40618 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40624 \begin_inset Index idx
40627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40636 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40639 \begin_layout Description
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40644 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40650 \begin_inset Index idx
40653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40657 -packages ! inputenc
40663 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40667 \begin_layout Description
40669 \begin_inset space ~
40673 \begin_inset space ~
40677 \begin_inset space ~
40680 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40687 \begin_layout Description
40689 \begin_inset space ~
40693 \begin_inset space ~
40697 \begin_inset space ~
40700 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40701 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40702 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40706 \begin_layout Description
40708 \begin_inset space ~
40712 \begin_inset space ~
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40719 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40720 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40723 \begin_layout Section
40725 \begin_inset Index idx
40728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40737 \begin_inset Index idx
40740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40749 \begin_inset Index idx
40752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40755 Color ! Shaded boxes
40761 \begin_inset Index idx
40764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40767 Color ! Greyed-out notes
40775 \begin_layout Standard
40776 Here you can alter the font color for the
40780 (default: black), for
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40788 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
40792 (default: white) and for
40795 \begin_inset space ~
40805 sets the color back to the default.
40808 \begin_layout Standard
40809 Clicking any button showing
40817 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
40818 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
40819 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
40820 later more quickly.
40823 \begin_layout Standard
40824 Note, if you change the
40827 \begin_inset space ~
40832 font color and use the option
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40840 in the document settings under
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40848 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
40849 \begin_inset space ~
40853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40855 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40862 \begin_layout Standard
40863 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40869 \begin_layout Standard
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40882 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40888 Code after a forced page break:
40891 \begin_layout Itemize
40892 For the page color:
40893 \begin_inset Newline newline
40900 pagecolor{color name}
40903 \begin_layout Itemize
40904 For the text color:
40905 \begin_inset Newline newline
40915 \begin_layout Standard
40916 You are restricted to one of
40952 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset Newline newline
40968 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
40969 names to refer to them:
40972 \begin_layout Itemize
40978 \begin_inset Newline newline
40983 page_backgroundcolor
40986 \begin_layout Itemize
40990 \begin_inset space ~
40996 \begin_inset Newline newline
41004 \begin_layout Itemize
41008 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \begin_inset Newline newline
41022 \begin_layout Itemize
41026 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset Newline newline
41040 \begin_layout Standard
41041 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_layout Section
41064 \begin_layout Standard
41065 Here you can adjust the
41069 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41073 as described in section
41074 \begin_inset space ~
41078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41080 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41087 \begin_layout Section
41091 \begin_layout Standard
41092 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41098 \begin_inset Index idx
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41115 \begin_inset Index idx
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41122 -packages ! jurabib
41130 Sectioned bibliography
41132 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41138 \begin_inset Index idx
41141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41145 -packages ! bibtopic
41150 and you can select a
41154 for the generation of the bibliography.
41155 For a further description see section
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41162 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41169 \begin_layout Section
41173 \begin_layout Standard
41174 Here you can define the
41178 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41186 reference "sec:Index"
41193 \begin_layout Section
41197 \begin_layout Standard
41198 The PDF properties are explained in section
41199 \begin_inset space ~
41203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41205 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41212 \begin_layout Section
41216 \begin_layout Standard
41217 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
41218 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41224 \begin_inset Index idx
41227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41231 -packages ! amsmath
41241 \begin_inset Index idx
41244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41248 -packages ! amssymb
41258 \begin_inset Index idx
41261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41275 \begin_inset Index idx
41278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41292 \begin_inset Index idx
41295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41299 -packages ! mathdots
41309 \begin_inset Index idx
41312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41316 -packages ! mathtools
41326 \begin_inset Index idx
41329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41343 \begin_inset Index idx
41346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41350 -packages ! stackrel
41360 \begin_inset Index idx
41363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41367 -packages ! stmaryrd
41377 \begin_inset Index idx
41380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41384 -packages ! undertilde
41389 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41392 \begin_layout Description
41393 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41394 -errors in formulas,
41395 ensure that you have this enabled.
41398 \begin_layout Description
41399 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
41400 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
41401 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
41405 \begin_layout Description
41406 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
41409 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_layout Description
41422 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41437 \begin_layout Description
41438 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41449 \begin_layout Description
41450 mathtools is used for the math commands
41486 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
41493 \begin_layout Description
41494 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41496 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41505 \begin_layout Description
41506 stackrel is used for the math command
41523 \begin_layout Description
41524 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
41527 \begin_layout Description
41528 undertilde is used for the math command
41536 Accents for one Character
41545 \begin_layout Section
41549 \begin_layout Standard
41550 The float placement options are described in the section
41553 \begin_inset space ~
41561 \begin_inset space ~
41569 \begin_layout Section
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41576 Program Code Listings
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41589 \begin_layout Section
41593 \begin_layout Standard
41594 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41602 set to be used and set the
41607 The itemize environment is described in section
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41614 reference "sec:Itemize"
41621 \begin_layout Standard
41622 You can furthermore specify a
41625 \begin_inset space ~
41630 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41631 command of the desired character.
41632 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41639 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41645 \begin_inset space \space{}
41649 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41659 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41660 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41663 \begin_layout Standard
41664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41672 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41673 -packages in the preamble (menu
41676 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41677 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41686 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41690 usepackage{textcomp}
41693 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41697 usepackage{amssymb}
41707 \begin_layout Section
41711 \begin_layout Standard
41712 Branches are described in section
41713 \begin_inset space ~
41717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41719 reference "sec:Branches"
41726 \begin_layout Section
41728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41730 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41737 \begin_layout Standard
41738 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41741 \begin_layout Description
41743 \begin_inset space ~
41747 \begin_inset space ~
41750 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41770 View Master Document
41771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41778 Update Master Document
41779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41786 menu or the toolbar.
41787 The default is set in
41789 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41790 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41792 \begin_inset space ~
41795 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41805 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41812 \begin_layout Description
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41821 Output settings for the menu
41823 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41825 \begin_inset space ~
41831 For a detailed description see section
41833 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41846 \begin_layout Description
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41852 \begin_inset space ~
41855 Options offers settings for the export format
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41868 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41872 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41876 \begin_inset space ~
41881 settings are described in detail in section
41883 Math Output in XHTML
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41897 \begin_inset space ~
41901 \begin_inset space ~
41906 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41909 \begin_layout Section
41913 \begin_layout Standard
41914 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41916 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
41918 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41920 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
41924 \begin_layout Standard
41925 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41926 -syntax is given in section
41927 \begin_inset space ~
41931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41933 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41940 \begin_layout Chapter
41941 The Preferences Dialog
41942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41944 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
41949 \begin_inset Index idx
41952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41963 \begin_layout Standard
41964 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
41966 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41970 It has the following submenus.
41973 \begin_layout Section
41977 \begin_layout Subsection
41981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41982 User Interface File
41983 \begin_inset Index idx
41986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41989 Customization ! of toolbars
41995 \begin_inset Index idx
41998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42001 Customization ! of menus
42009 \begin_layout Standard
42010 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42011 interface (ui) file.
42012 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42020 \begin_layout Description
42025 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42028 \begin_layout Description
42035 the menu entries in popup context menus
42038 \begin_layout Description
42043 specifies the toolbar buttons
42046 \begin_layout Standard
42047 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42048 and edit the entries.
42051 \begin_layout Standard
42052 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42064 entries must be finished with an explicit
42089 and in the case of the
42090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42102 The syntax for the entries is:
42105 \begin_layout Standard
42106 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42135 \begin_layout Standard
42137 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42140 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42141 -functions are listed in the menu
42143 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42145 \begin_inset space ~
42153 \begin_layout Standard
42154 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42160 \begin_layout Standard
42161 For example, assuming you use the menu
42163 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42166 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42170 \begin_layout Standard
42171 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42195 \begin_layout Standard
42197 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42212 to have the sixth bookmark.
42215 \begin_layout Standard
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42224 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
42225 's toolbar buttons.
42226 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42227 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42230 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42241 \begin_layout Standard
42244 Enable tool tips in main work area
42246 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42250 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42254 \begin_layout Standard
42259 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
42260 should display in the menu
42262 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42272 \begin_layout Subsection
42276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42280 \begin_layout Standard
42283 Restore window layouts and geometries
42286 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
42287 the last \SpecialChar LyX
42291 \begin_layout Standard
42294 Restore cursor positions
42296 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42300 \begin_layout Standard
42303 Load opened files from last session
42305 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
42309 \begin_layout Standard
42312 Clear all session information
42314 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
42315 sessions (cursor positions, names
42316 of last opened documents, etc.).
42319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42323 name "subsec:Backup documents"
42328 \begin_inset Index idx
42331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42342 \begin_layout Standard
42345 Backup original documents when saving
42347 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42348 it was saved the last time.
42349 It is stored in the
42352 \begin_inset space ~
42358 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42364 reference "sec:Paths"
42368 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42371 \begin_inset space ~
42377 The backup file has the file extension
42378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42395 Backup documents, every
42397 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42400 \begin_layout Standard
42403 Save documents compressed by default
42405 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
42406 \begin_inset space ~
42410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42412 reference "subsec:Compressed"
42417 This applies to newly created documents only.
42418 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
42421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42422 Windows & work area
42425 \begin_layout Standard
42428 Open documents in tabs
42430 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
42434 \begin_layout Standard
42439 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
42444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42452 reference "sec:Paths"
42456 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
42463 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
42464 documents will be opened in the same running instance
42465 of \SpecialChar LyX
42467 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
42468 instance is created for each file.
42471 \begin_layout Standard
42474 Single close-tab button
42476 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42479 \begin_inset Graphics
42480 filename ../../images/closetab.svgz
42487 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42488 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42491 \begin_layout Standard
42492 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42500 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
42501 before the change takes effect.
42509 \begin_layout Standard
42514 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
42516 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
42518 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
42522 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
42523 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
42524 and only want to close the view in once instance.
42527 \begin_layout Subsection
42529 \begin_inset Index idx
42532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42543 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42550 \begin_layout Standard
42551 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
42555 \begin_layout Standard
42556 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42564 This section only deals with the fonts
42568 the \SpecialChar LyX
42570 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42574 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42585 \begin_layout Standard
42586 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
42603 (depends on the system) as its
42606 \begin_inset space ~
42622 \begin_layout Standard
42623 You can change the font size with the
42630 \begin_layout Standard
42635 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42640 points have the size of 1
42641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42645 \begin_inset space ~
42649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42651 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42656 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42661 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42662 \begin_inset space ~
42666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42668 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
42675 \begin_layout Standard
42678 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42680 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
42681 needs to redraw the screen less often.
42682 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42683 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42684 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42686 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42687 \begin_inset space ~
42693 \begin_layout Subsection
42695 \begin_inset Index idx
42698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42701 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
42708 \begin_inset Index idx
42711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42722 \begin_layout Standard
42723 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
42724 by choosing an item in the
42725 list and selecting the
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 By checking the option
42737 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42740 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42745 \begin_inset space ~
42750 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42753 \begin_layout Subsection
42755 \begin_inset Index idx
42758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 \begin_layout Standard
42770 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
42774 \begin_layout Standard
42779 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42780 This feature is described in section
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42787 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42794 \begin_layout Standard
42795 Checking the option
42798 \begin_inset space ~
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42806 \begin_inset space ~
42811 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42814 \begin_layout Section
42816 \begin_inset Index idx
42819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 \begin_layout Subsection
42834 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42838 \begin_layout Standard
42841 Cursor follows scrollbar
42843 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42847 \begin_layout Standard
42848 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42849 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42850 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42853 \begin_layout Standard
42856 Scroll below end of document
42858 is self-explanatory.
42861 \begin_layout Standard
42862 In \SpecialChar LyX
42863 one can jump from word to word by pressing
42870 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42872 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42873 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42876 \begin_layout Standard
42879 Sort environments alphabetically
42881 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42884 \begin_layout Standard
42887 Group environments by their category
42889 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42892 \begin_layout Standard
42897 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42912 \begin_layout Standard
42913 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42918 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42919 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42923 \begin_layout Subsection
42925 \begin_inset Index idx
42928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42937 \begin_inset Index idx
42940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42943 Settings ! Shortcuts
42951 \begin_layout Standard
42956 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
42958 Several binding files are available, among them:
42961 \begin_layout Description
42962 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42965 \begin_layout Description
42966 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42978 \begin_layout Description
42979 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42990 \begin_layout Standard
42991 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
42996 , and binding files for special languages.
42997 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
42998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43002 \begin_inset space \space{}
43006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43014 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43015 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43016 will try to use the appropriate binding
43020 \begin_layout Standard
43021 Some binding files, like
43025 , only have a limited scope.
43026 When looking at the end of the file
43030 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43033 \begin_layout Standard
43037 \begin_inset space ~
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43046 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43047 in the selected key binding file.
43050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43054 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43059 \begin_inset Index idx
43062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43065 Key Bindings ! Editing
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43074 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43075 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43076 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43077 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43080 Show key-bindings containing
43083 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43084 Insert there for example as keyword
43085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43092 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43093 functions that contain
43094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43102 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43103 All \SpecialChar LyX
43104 functions are also listed in the file
43109 that you will find in the
43116 \begin_layout Standard
43117 For example, to add the shortcut
43125 , select the function and press the
43130 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43131 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43134 \begin_layout Standard
43135 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43136 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43138 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43139 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43141 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43146 \begin_layout Standard
43147 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43150 \begin_layout Standard
43151 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43153 The syntax of the entries is:
43156 \begin_layout Standard
43162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43181 \begin_layout Subsection
43183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43185 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43190 \begin_inset Index idx
43193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43202 \begin_inset Index idx
43205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43208 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43216 \begin_layout Standard
43217 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43218 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43219 provides keyboard maps.
43220 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43221 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43224 \begin_inset space ~
43228 \begin_inset space ~
43233 and select the keyboard map file named
43240 \begin_layout Standard
43249 keyboard map and, if you use the
43253 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43256 arg "keymap-primary"
43262 arg "keymap-secondary"
43265 respectively or toggle between them with
43268 arg "keymap-toggle"
43274 \begin_layout Standard
43275 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43283 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43292 \begin_layout Standard
43293 You can also specify the mouse
43295 Wheel scrolling speed
43298 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43302 \begin_layout Standard
43310 \begin_inset space ~
43314 \begin_inset space ~
43319 you can select a key for zooming.
43320 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43323 \begin_layout Subsection
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 Input completion is described in section
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43335 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43342 \begin_layout Section
43344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43351 \begin_inset Index idx
43354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43363 \begin_inset Index idx
43366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43377 \begin_layout Standard
43378 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
43379 are normally determined during
43381 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43384 \begin_layout Description
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43389 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
43390 's working directory.
43391 It is the default when you
43402 \begin_inset space ~
43410 \begin_layout Description
43412 \begin_inset space ~
43415 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43417 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43419 \begin_inset space ~
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43431 \begin_layout Description
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43436 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43442 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43446 \begin_inset Newline newline
43450 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43462 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
43463 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43471 \begin_layout Description
43473 \begin_inset space ~
43477 \begin_inset Index idx
43480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43488 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43489 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43490 \begin_inset space ~
43494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43496 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43504 will be used to save the backups.
43505 \begin_inset Newline newline
43508 Backup files have the ending
43509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43519 \begin_layout Description
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43524 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43525 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
43527 \begin_inset Newline newline
43534 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43540 You can edit this file with the program
43549 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
43550 in its preferences under
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43559 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43564 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
43566 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43567 in your \SpecialChar LyX
43573 and \SpecialChar LyX
43574 need to be running the same time.
43575 \begin_inset Newline newline
43578 The pipe is also used for the
43583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43589 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
43594 \begin_inset Newline newline
43597 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
43598 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43599 \begin_inset Newline newline
43615 \begin_layout Description
43617 \begin_inset space ~
43620 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43623 \begin_layout Description
43625 \begin_inset space ~
43628 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43629 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43630 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43633 \begin_layout Description
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43638 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43644 You only need to specify it if you are using
43648 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43650 For \SpecialChar LyX
43655 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43659 \begin_layout Description
43661 \begin_inset space ~
43664 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43665 When \SpecialChar LyX
43666 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
43667 to find it on the system.
43668 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
43670 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43679 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43680 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43683 \begin_layout Description
43685 \begin_inset space ~
43688 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43689 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
43690 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
43691 code or in the document
43693 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43695 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43696 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43697 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43698 scanned for the input files.
43699 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43700 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
43702 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43703 compilation may fail for some documents.
43706 \begin_layout Section
43710 \begin_layout Standard
43711 Here you can insert your
43720 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43728 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43732 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43735 \begin_layout Section
43737 \begin_inset Index idx
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43743 Language ! Settings
43749 \begin_inset Index idx
43752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43755 Settings ! Language
43763 \begin_layout Subsection
43765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43767 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43774 \begin_layout Description
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43780 \begin_inset space ~
43783 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
43785 You can find its actual translation status here:
43786 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43788 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43795 \begin_layout Description
43797 \begin_inset space ~
43800 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
43801 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
43802 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43803 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43820 The most widespread language package is
43825 \begin_inset Index idx
43828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43837 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
43839 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43840 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43841 come with the alternative
43847 \begin_inset Index idx
43850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43854 -packages ! polyglossia
43859 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43860 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43866 The available selections are described in section
43867 \begin_inset space ~
43871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43873 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43880 \begin_layout Description
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43885 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43886 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
43887 you can here specify the command to start the package.
43888 An example is the start command
43894 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43896 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
43900 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43915 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43920 \begin_layout Description
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43930 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43931 command toggles the package on and off.
43934 \begin_layout Description
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43940 \begin_inset space ~
43943 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43947 \begin_layout Description
43949 \begin_inset space ~
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43956 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
43960 \begin_layout Description
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43966 \begin_inset space ~
43969 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43970 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43971 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
43973 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43980 \begin_layout Description
43982 \begin_inset space ~
43985 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43987 When this option is not set, the
43990 \begin_inset space ~
43995 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43997 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44008 \begin_layout Description
44010 \begin_inset space ~
44016 \begin_inset space ~
44022 When it is not set, the
44025 \begin_inset space ~
44030 is set to the end of the document.
44033 \begin_layout Description
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_inset space ~
44042 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44043 language will be underlined in blue.
44046 \begin_layout Description
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44052 \begin_inset space ~
44055 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44056 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44059 \begin_layout Description
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44064 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44065 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44066 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44067 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44070 \begin_layout Subsection
44074 \begin_layout Standard
44075 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44082 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44089 \begin_layout Section
44093 \begin_layout Subsection
44097 \begin_layout Description
44099 \begin_inset space ~
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44106 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44109 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44110 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44118 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44121 \begin_layout Description
44123 \begin_inset space ~
44127 \begin_inset Index idx
44130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44139 \begin_inset Index idx
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 Settings ! Date format
44150 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44151 \begin_inset Newline newline
44155 \begin_inset Flex URL
44158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44160 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44166 \begin_inset Newline newline
44169 For example the format
44170 \begin_inset Newline newline
44174 \begin_inset Newline newline
44177 prints the date as day/month/year.
44180 \begin_layout Description
44182 \begin_inset space ~
44186 \begin_inset space ~
44189 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44190 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44193 \begin_layout Description
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44198 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44200 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44202 \begin_inset space ~
44208 For a detailed description see section
44210 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44223 \begin_layout Subsection
44225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44227 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44232 \begin_inset Index idx
44235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44238 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44247 \begin_layout Description
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44257 \begin_inset space ~
44260 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44265 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44286 are used for Cyrillic.
44287 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44300 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44302 sets up in the background.
44303 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44306 \begin_layout Description
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44312 \begin_inset space ~
44315 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44320 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44324 \begin_layout Description
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44334 \begin_inset space ~
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44341 options They only have an effect when the program
44345 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44348 \begin_layout Standard
44349 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44350 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44351 manuals of the applications.
44354 \begin_layout Description
44356 \begin_inset space ~
44359 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44360 \begin_inset space ~
44364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44366 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
44373 \begin_layout Description
44375 \begin_inset space ~
44378 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44385 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
44392 \begin_layout Description
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44397 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44398 \begin_inset space ~
44402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44404 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
44411 \begin_layout Description
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44416 command Command for the program
44418 Check\SpecialChar TeX
44421 that is described in the section
44423 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
44428 Additional Features
44433 \begin_layout Standard
44434 There are additionally the following options:
44437 \begin_layout Description
44439 \begin_inset space ~
44443 \begin_inset space ~
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44451 \begin_inset space ~
44456 \begin_inset space ~
44459 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44477 to separate folders.
44478 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
44480 \begin_inset Index idx
44483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44492 \begin_inset Index idx
44495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44506 \begin_layout Description
44508 \begin_inset space ~
44512 \begin_inset space ~
44516 \begin_inset space ~
44520 \begin_inset space ~
44524 \begin_inset space ~
44528 \begin_inset space ~
44531 changes Removes all manually set
44537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44538 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44540 \begin_inset space ~
44545 dialog when changing the document class.
44548 \begin_layout Section
44550 \begin_inset space ~
44554 \begin_inset Index idx
44557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 \begin_layout Subsection
44570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44572 name "subsec:Converters"
44577 \begin_inset Index idx
44580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44591 \begin_layout Standard
44592 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44593 from one format to another.
44594 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44595 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44602 \begin_inset space ~
44607 field and press the
44612 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44616 \begin_inset space ~
44621 drop-down list, modify the
44625 field and press the
44632 \begin_layout Standard
44635 Converter File Cache
44641 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44643 Maximum Age (in days
44646 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44647 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44650 \begin_layout Standard
44651 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44652 definition, is described in the section
44663 \begin_layout Subsection
44665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44667 name "sec:File-Formats"
44672 \begin_inset Index idx
44675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44684 \begin_inset Index idx
44687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 \begin_layout Standard
44699 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
44709 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44712 \begin_layout Standard
44713 You can also define the
44715 Default output format
44717 that is used when you use
44719 View, Update, View Master Document
44723 Update Master Document
44729 menu or the toolbar.
44732 \begin_layout Standard
44733 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44744 \begin_layout Standard
44745 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
44747 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44748 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44749 This is done by specifying a
44754 More about this is described in the section
44765 \begin_layout Chapter
44766 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44768 \begin_inset Index idx
44771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44782 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44789 \begin_layout Standard
44791 \begin_inset space ~
44795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44797 reference "tab:Units"
44801 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
44802 and used in this documentation.
44805 \begin_layout Standard
44806 \begin_inset Float table
44812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44813 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44833 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 \begin_inset Tabular
44842 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
44843 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
44844 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44845 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44846 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45052 scaled point (65536
45053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45131 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45204 % of original image width
45209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45520 \begin_layout Chapter
45522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45524 name "chap:Credits"
45531 \begin_layout Standard
45532 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45533 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45536 \begin_layout Itemize
45539 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45542 \begin_layout Itemize
45548 \begin_layout Itemize
45554 \begin_layout Itemize
45560 \begin_layout Itemize
45566 \begin_layout Itemize
45572 \begin_layout Itemize
45578 \begin_layout Itemize
45584 \begin_layout Itemize
45587 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45590 \begin_layout Itemize
45596 \begin_layout Itemize
45602 \begin_layout Itemize
45608 \begin_layout Itemize
45614 \begin_layout Itemize
45620 \begin_layout Itemize
45626 \begin_layout Itemize
45632 \begin_layout Itemize
45638 \begin_layout Itemize
45639 The \SpecialChar LyX
45641 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45650 \begin_layout Standard
45651 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45654 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45661 \begin_layout Bibliography
45662 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45663 LatexCommand bibitem
45669 The \SpecialChar LyX
45671 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45674 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45679 \begin_inset Newline newline
45683 \begin_inset Flex URL
45686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45688 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45696 \begin_layout Bibliography
45697 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45698 LatexCommand bibitem
45699 key "latexcompanion"
45703 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45705 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45706 Companion Second Edition.
45709 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45712 \begin_layout Bibliography
45713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45714 LatexCommand bibitem
45719 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45722 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45726 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45729 \begin_layout Bibliography
45730 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45731 LatexCommand bibitem
45739 : A Document Preparation System.
45742 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45745 \begin_layout Bibliography
45746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45747 LatexCommand bibitem
45756 The \SpecialChar TeX
45760 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45763 \begin_layout Bibliography
45764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45765 LatexCommand bibitem
45770 The \SpecialChar TeX
45772 \begin_inset Newline newline
45776 \begin_inset Flex URL
45779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45781 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45789 \begin_layout Bibliography
45790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45791 LatexCommand bibitem
45796 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
45798 \begin_inset Newline newline
45802 \begin_inset Flex URL
45805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
45815 \begin_layout Bibliography
45816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45817 LatexCommand bibitem
45823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45825 name "Documentation"
45826 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45832 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45836 \begin_inset Newline newline
45840 \begin_inset Flex URL
45843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45845 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45853 \begin_layout Bibliography
45854 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45855 LatexCommand bibitem
45861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45863 name "Documentation"
45864 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45868 how to use the program
45870 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45874 \begin_inset Newline newline
45878 \begin_inset Flex URL
45881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45883 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45891 \begin_layout Bibliography
45892 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45893 LatexCommand bibitem
45899 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45901 name "Documentation"
45902 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45911 \begin_inset Newline newline
45915 \begin_inset Flex URL
45918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45920 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45928 \begin_layout Bibliography
45929 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45930 LatexCommand bibitem
45931 key "makeindex-man"
45936 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45939 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
45948 \begin_inset Newline newline
45952 \begin_inset Flex URL
45955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
45965 \begin_layout Bibliography
45966 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45967 LatexCommand bibitem
45973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45975 name "Documentation"
45976 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45985 \begin_inset Newline newline
45989 \begin_inset Flex URL
45992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45994 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46002 \begin_layout Bibliography
46003 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46004 LatexCommand bibitem
46010 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46012 name "Documentation"
46013 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46017 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46019 \begin_inset Newline newline
46023 \begin_inset Flex URL
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46028 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46036 \begin_layout Bibliography
46037 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46038 LatexCommand bibitem
46044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46046 name "Documentation"
46047 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46051 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46057 \begin_inset Index idx
46060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 -packages ! caption
46070 \begin_inset Newline newline
46074 \begin_inset Flex URL
46077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46087 \begin_layout Bibliography
46088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46089 LatexCommand bibitem
46095 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46097 name "Documentation"
46098 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46102 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46108 \begin_inset Index idx
46111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46115 -packages ! enumitem
46121 \begin_inset Newline newline
46125 \begin_inset Flex URL
46128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46130 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46138 \begin_layout Bibliography
46139 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46140 LatexCommand bibitem
46146 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46148 name "Documentation"
46149 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46153 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46159 \begin_inset Index idx
46162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 -packages ! fancyhdr
46172 \begin_inset Newline newline
46176 \begin_inset Flex URL
46179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46181 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46189 \begin_layout Bibliography
46190 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46191 LatexCommand bibitem
46197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46199 name "Documentation"
46200 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46204 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46210 \begin_inset Index idx
46213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 -packages ! hyperref
46223 \begin_inset Newline newline
46227 \begin_inset Flex URL
46230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46232 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46240 \begin_layout Bibliography
46241 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46242 LatexCommand bibitem
46248 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46250 name "Documentation"
46251 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46255 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46261 \begin_inset Index idx
46264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46268 -packages ! nomencl
46274 \begin_inset Newline newline
46278 \begin_inset Flex URL
46281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46283 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46291 \begin_layout Bibliography
46292 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46293 LatexCommand bibitem
46299 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46301 name "Documentation"
46302 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46306 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46312 \begin_inset Index idx
46315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46319 -packages ! prettyref
46325 \begin_inset Newline newline
46329 \begin_inset Flex URL
46332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46334 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46342 \begin_layout Bibliography
46343 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46344 LatexCommand bibitem
46350 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46352 name "Documentation"
46353 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46357 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46363 \begin_inset Index idx
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46370 -packages ! refstyle
46376 \begin_inset Newline newline
46380 \begin_inset Flex URL
46383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46385 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46393 \begin_layout Bibliography
46394 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46395 LatexCommand bibitem
46401 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46404 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46408 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46410 \begin_inset Newline newline
46414 \begin_inset Flex URL
46417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46419 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46427 \begin_layout Bibliography
46428 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46429 LatexCommand bibitem
46435 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46438 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46442 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46444 \begin_inset Newline newline
46448 \begin_inset Flex URL
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46453 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46461 \begin_layout Bibliography
46462 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46463 LatexCommand bibitem
46469 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46472 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46476 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46477 for Cyrillic languages:
46478 \begin_inset Newline newline
46482 \begin_inset Flex URL
46485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46487 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46495 \begin_layout Bibliography
46496 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46497 LatexCommand bibitem
46503 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46506 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46510 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46512 \begin_inset Newline newline
46516 \begin_inset Flex URL
46519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46521 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46529 \begin_layout Bibliography
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46531 LatexCommand bibitem
46537 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46540 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46544 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46546 \begin_inset Newline newline
46550 \begin_inset Flex URL
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46555 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46563 \begin_layout Bibliography
46564 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46565 LatexCommand bibitem
46571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46574 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46578 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46580 \begin_inset Newline newline
46584 \begin_inset Flex URL
46587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46589 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46597 \begin_layout Bibliography
46598 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46599 LatexCommand bibitem
46605 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46608 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46612 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46614 \begin_inset Newline newline
46618 \begin_inset Flex URL
46621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46623 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46631 \begin_layout Bibliography
46632 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46633 LatexCommand bibitem
46639 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46642 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46646 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46648 \begin_inset Newline newline
46652 \begin_inset Flex URL
46655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46657 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46665 \begin_layout Bibliography
46666 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46667 LatexCommand bibitem
46673 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46676 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46680 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46682 \begin_inset Newline newline
46686 \begin_inset Flex URL
46689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46691 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46699 \begin_layout Bibliography
46700 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46701 LatexCommand bibitem
46707 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46710 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46714 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46716 \begin_inset Newline newline
46720 \begin_inset Flex URL
46723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46725 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46733 \begin_layout Bibliography
46734 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46735 LatexCommand bibitem
46741 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46744 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46748 about new features in
46754 \begin_inset Newline newline
46758 \begin_inset Flex URL
46761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46763 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46771 \begin_layout Standard
46772 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46806 \begin_inset Note Note
46809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46818 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46819 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46820 bibliography is the second one:
46828 \begin_layout Standard
46829 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46830 LatexCommand bibtex
46831 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
46832 options "../biblio/alphadin"
46839 \begin_layout Standard
46840 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46844 \begin_layout Standard
46845 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46846 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46852 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46853 LatexCommand printindex